Power Hacker 2003/Power_Hacker_2003.iso/E-zine/Magazines/pimp/pimp15.glo

Text File | 2002-05-27 | 415.1 KB | 12,164 lines

   |                                      |
---+--------------------------------------+----
   |     ____   ____   _    _   ____      |
        |  \ | |_  _| | \__/ | | /  |
        | \ _|  _||_  |      | |  /_|     |                |
        |__|   |____| |_|\/|_| |__|     --+----------------+---
   |                                      |                |
---+-----------           PROBE INDUSTRIES MAGAZINE PHILES
   |           |          ISSUE NUMBER 15
            ---+---       RELEASED: 11/20/97                |
               |                                            |
                  ----------+-------------------------------+----
                            |                               |
        |
--------+-----
        |   get new issues and news from us via the web:

                 http://www.dope.org/pimp/               |
                                          ---------------+---
                                                         |

+---------------------------------------------------------------+
|     p  u  b  l  i  c  l  y      d  i  s  c  l  o  s  e  d     |
|    a     f     f     i     l     i     a     t     e     s    |
+----------------+------------------+---------------------------+
|  known as:     |    pimp domain   |          info             |
+----------------+------------------+---------------------------+
| fringe         | chicago, il, usa |     [e-mail]       |
| stickman       | chicago, il, usa |       apocapimpin'        |
| subhuman       | chicago, il, usa |    [e-mail]      |
| stash          | chicago, il, usa |      [e-mail]       |
| insane lineman | chicago, il, usa |     [e-mail]      |
| jello biafra   | chicago, il, usa |       apocapimpin'        |
| smokee         | chicago, il, usa |         pimpin'           |
| qball          | chicago, il, usa |         pimpin'           |
| special-k      |      germany     |    [e-mail]     |
| luthor         |    maine, usa    |   east coast HQ, pimpin'  |
| -Q-            |  new york, usa   |         pimpin'           |
| mastermind     |     florida      |         pimpin'           |
| jcgangster     |      ohio        |         pimpin'           |
+----------------+------------------+---------------------------+

preface:

    the magazine following is an electronic publication to help inform
    society on details they may overlook in life, computers and
    telephony they may not understand, and to broaden anyone and
    everyone's knowledge.  there is no blatently illegal information
    discussed here.  there is knowledge and understanding..

    knowledge is the power, the power to the people, the people
    are the knowledge.  everything is on a need to know basis for us.
    we all need the want to know.


==============================
  contents for issue fifteen
==============================

╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕
╕         ╕                                                         ╕
╕   THE   ╕ THE LARGEST CELLULAR GLOSSARY and acronyms compilation  ╕
╕         ╕ you will ever see.  This mainly pertains to cell sites  ╕
╕ BIG ONE ╕ and cellular radios.                                    ╕
╕         ╕                                                         ╕
╕         ╕                             pimped: anonymously         ╕
╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕
╕         ╕                                                         ╕
╕ SECOND  ╕   news for and about the underground                    ╕
╕         ╕  ------------------------------------                   ╕
╕ SEKSHUN ╕       EPHEDRA gets GANKED!                              ╕
╕         ╕                                     -fringe             ╕
╕         ╕                                                         ╕
╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕╕

+-----------------------------------------------------+

               oneoneone1oneoneone
           oneoneon11oneoneone
           oneoneo1e1oneoneone
           oneoneone1oneoneone
               oneoneone1oneoneone
               oneoneone1oneoneone
               oneone111111eoneone


                   [ ]
                    |
                    |
                    |
                    |
                    |
  __________________|
./        ////       \
 |        ////       |
 |                   |
 |  ____________     |
 | |            |[]  |            Oki 900 art
 | |            |[]  |                   courtesy of jcgangster
 | |            |[]  |
 | |____________|[]  |
 |                   |
 |  ( 1 )( 2 )( 3 )  |
 |  ( 4 )( 5 )( 6 )  |
 |  ( 7 )( 8 )( 9 )  |
 |  ( * )( 0 )( # )  |
 |    ( )( )( )( )   |
 |  (Snd)(Clr)(End)  |
 |                   |
 |                   |
 |    //////////     |
 \___________________/

    Welcome to the biggest cellular glossary you will
    ever need.. hopefully this will teach people cellco
    jargon and maybe help them understand things better.

    When pimp received this file, there were no marks
    on it as to who owned it or whether or not it was
    considered confidential.. so it isn't.. it's just
    definitions that are hard to get.


+----------------------------------------------------------+




$APPL1
     IS-41 Converter- Tandem Application Disk

$DATA
     IS-41 Converter- Tandem Data Disk

$S
     Spooler Subsystem Collector Process

$SP25
     Spooler Subsystem Craft Workstation Print Process

$SPLP
     Spooler Subsystem CLX Print Process

$SPLS
     Spooler Subsystem Supervisor Process

$SYSTEM
     IS-41 Converter- Tandem System Disk

10-Channel Junction
     Used in the DYNA TAC base station to combine the output of the nine (9)
     cavity filters to produce a single output for the transmit antenna (via
     the harmonic filter).

100 Call Seconds
     See CCS (100 Call Seconds).

125 mS
     A frame timing reference signal generated by the STC in the XC GCLK
     card.

1.544 Mbps
     Data transmission rate of a single frame, comprised of 24 64 kbps
     channels.

16.384 Mhz
     A TDM clock timing reference signal generated by the STC in the XC GCLK
     card.

1-Plus
     Areas where a digit "1" must be dialed before a telephone number. A
     1-plus usually indicates a toll call or an extended area call.

1WL
     One-way level.

1WN
     One-way noise.

2.048 Mbps
     Data transmission rate of a single frame, comprised of 32 64 kbps
     channels.

3-sector
     Antenna configuration, requires one transmit antenna per 120-degree
     sector, plus two receive antennas for diversity reception. Duplexers
     may be used to combine transmit and receive functions on the same
     antenna. Allows a 7-cell reuse pattern for voice channels.

4MRAM
     Four Megabyte Random Access Memory

6-sector
     Antenna configuration, requires six 60-degree antennas. Each antenna
     both transmits and receives. Allows a 4-cell reuse pattern for voice
     channels.

6.12 S
     A superframe timing reference signal generated by the STC in the XC
     GCLK card.

60 mS
     A synchronization timing reference signal generated by the STC in the
     XC GCLK card.

64 kbps
     Data transmission rate of a single channel, based upon eight bit words
     and 8000 samples per second.

<Control A>
     Pressing the "Control" and "A" keys simultaneously; aborts any MMI.

<Return>
     The key on the terminal keyboard labeled "Return" which generates the
     carriage return character when pressed. Same as <CR>.

<Shift>
     A terminal's Shift key. Always used in conjunction with another key.
     For example, "<Shift> + P" means to hold down the Shift key and press
     the P key.


+---+
| A |
+---+

A+ interface
     One of the major interfaces from the MSC. Connects the MSC to the SC
     9600 system at the CBSC XC. The interface is comprised of E1 or T1 span
     lines. Each span line represents a single carrier, and provides a
     number of timeslots which can be used for signaling links with BSSAP
     (LAPD or LAPB) control or traffic circuit channels as required.

Abbreviated Mobile Usage Record (ABMUR)
     The record sent to the billing medium in each machine that a mobile
     passes through, with the exception of the originating switch. It
     contains the originating switch, current switch, air time on this
     switch, and a few other essential fields for correlating back to the
     original record. This record is an operator's receipt for air time used
     on his switch.

ABEND
     Abnormal ending of a process.

ACB
     All channels busy.

Access Channel
     In DYNA TAC systems, a control channel used by a mobile station to
     access a system to obtain service.

Access Priority (ACCPRIOR)
     In DYNA TAC systems, the access priority on the reverse control
     channel. See Numeric Information.

Access Thresholds
     A purchasable Special Product which specifies, on a per-sector basis, a
     minimum received power required for a mobile to be allowed to access
     the cell. Used to restrict originations on very busy cells to the best
     candidates.

ACCH
     Appended Control Channel. A user specified RFchannel providing
     point-to-point bi-directional signaling up- and downlink. Includes the
     SACCH and FACCH.

ACCPRIOR
     The access priority on the reverse control channel. See Numeric
     Information.

ACIA
     Asynchronous Communications Interface Adapter

ACK
     Acknowledgement.

Acknowledge (ACK)
     (1) The ACK signal is an active low pulse from the active Control Bus
     Interface (CBI) to the Switch Matrix Processor (SMP). The signal
     indicates that the board(s) addressed for the current bus cycle have
     responded. Failure to receive the ACK signal during control bus state 7
     causes the requesting SMP to generate a bus timeout interrupt. (2) A
     message sent from a mobile to a base site to indicate that it has
     received a page.

Acknowledged Alarm
     The operator has an acknowledged alarm condition, but the condition
     itself has not yet been resolved. The audible alarm (for this alarm) is
     turned off. However, the alarm status remains on until the alarm
     condition is resolved. The audible alarm will remain on if there are
     other posted unacknowledged alarms.

Active-Duplex (ACT-DUP)
     This is an EMX twin processor and control system state in which the
     processor performs the normal active processor functions. These
     functions include, but are not limited to:

   * All call processing activities.
   * All human/machine activities.
   * And all data collection activities.

In addition to:

   * Monitors the standby processor alarms.
   * Executes sanity checks on the standby processor.
   * Formats and sends checkpointed data for data base updates (as
     required).
   * Responds to standby processor reconfiguration directives.
   * Manages twin processor Dynamic-Duplex fault detection exercises between
     the active and standby processors.

Active Operation
     This mode of operation implies that the system can properly complete a
     significant percentage of call attempts. If the operator places the
     system in a state (by removing the second of a dual processor pair)
     that prevents the processing of telephone traffic, it is not active but
     still on-line. The Administration Complex is not required for the
     processing of telephone traffic and may not be operational, although
     the system may be active.

Active Process
     Process which is executable by having its entry in the active process
     table set. (See Active Process Table.)

Active Process Table
     Table which indicates for each process:

   * Whether the process is active in the processor containing the table,
   * Whether the process is active in the other processor of the pair, and
   * Any special activity restrictions, such as active for initiation only,
     etc.

Active Processor
     The processor in control of a node.

Active-Simplex (ACT-SIMP)
     This is an EMX twin processor and control system state in which the
     processor performs the normal active processor functions. These
     functions include, but are not limited to:

   * All call processing activities.
   * All human/machine activities.
   * All data collection activities.

In addition, if the node/system is in static-duplex, it monitors the
following:

   * Standby processor alarms.
   * Execution of sanity checks on the standby processor.
   * Response to standby processor reconfiguration directives.

Active Version
     Active software version.

ACT-REST
     Active-Restore

ACT-TNS
     Active-Time Not Set

ACT-TS
     Active-Time Set

A/D
     Analog-to-Digital

ADCCP
     Advanced Data Communication Control Procedure

ADDR
     Address

Address
     1) That portion of the message that specifies the destination and
     handling. A telephone address includes the precedence digit, two
     routing digits, a three-digit area code, three-digit central office
     code and four-digit line number. 2) An identification, represented by a
     name, or number, location in storage, or any other data source or
     destination.

ADE or ADMEXT
     See Administration Manager Extension.

ADM
     Administration Subsystem Manager Processor. The dominant processor in
     the processor hierarchy of the Administration Subsystem.

ADM-E
     See Administration Manager Extension.

ADMIN
     (1) See Admin Manager. (2) IPR log type for Administrative IPRs.

Administration Manager Extension (ADM-E, ADMX)
     A processor belonging to the Admin Manager which does all the tandeming
     of message traffic for the Admin Manager. Controls the second highest
     level bus in the distributed control hierarchy. Detects problems in the
     system by using testing, common control testing, scheduled testing,
     statistical analysis, audits, CAMP monitoring, alarm detection, and
     constantly monitoring the system.

Administrative Complex
     The minimum set of system devices required to operate the system
     terminals on-line consisting of at least one of each of the following
     dual devices: Administration Manager; Communications Processor;
     administration disk; administration external memory, and communication
     external memory, and data link controllers.

Administrative Initial Program Load (AIPL)
     An initial program load that loads and restarts only the Admin
     processors. Also see Initial Program Load.

Administrative/Maintenance Subsystem
     Collects and stores automatic message accounting (AMA) and traffic
     measurement and metering (TMM) data, controls configurations, downloads
     program and data base data and interfaces the alarm and trunk test
     subsystems. All these functions are controlled by the admin manager and
     admin manager extension, which are microprocessor pairs residing at the
     two highest levels of the control hierarchy.

Admin Manager (ADM, ADMIN)
     The highest level processor in the hierarchy of the EMXt 2500 system.
     The ADM consists of dual processors and has direct access to the dual
     Administrative disk drives, the dual Administrative tape drives, dual
     external shared memory, the Communications Processor, and the Admin
     Extension Processor (ADE).

ADPCM
     Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation.

ADS
     Automated Database Synchronization Facility. This is a newly proposed
     TTD product.

AFC
     Automatic Frequency Control.

AGC
     Automatic Gain Control.

AIN
     Advanced Intelligent Network.

AIP
     Application Software Installation Program.

AIPL
     See Administrative Initial Program Load.

Air-Time
     The time, generally, that an RF channel (or channels) are in use. This
     includes, but is not limited to, the accumulated time that a subscriber
     unit is engaged in a conversation.

AIS
     Alarm Indication Signal.

Alarm
     A warning signal, either a visual signal (lighted lamp) or an audible
     signal (bell or buzzer) which alerts personnel to an error or failure
     condition.

Alarm Class
     The severity level of the alarm condition. The values are minor, major,
     and catastrophic.

Alarm Display
     The top five lines of the CAMP screen are reserved for the alarm
     notification display. The minor, major, and catastrophic alarm counts
     and an alarm text for the most recently posted unacknowledged ON alarm
     of the highest alarm class are displayed for each alarm type. There is
     also a frame alarm.

Alarm Indicator Messages
     Messages sent to EMX alarm and status panels to turn off various LEDs
     or audible alarms. Alarm messages can also be printed on the
     teleprinters.

Alarm Indicators
     Messages sent to EMX alarm and status panels to turn on or off various
     LEDs or audible alarms.

Alarm and Status Electronics Board (ASEB)
     The ASEB is located at the rear of each alarm and status cage. It
     accepts display data in a differential mode from the alarm and status
     interface board, decodes the display module address and forwards the
     TTL display data to the Alarm and Status Lamp Module (ASLM) and Alarm
     and Status Switch Module (ASSM).

Alarm and Status Electronics and Relay Board (ASERB)
     The ASERB is located at the rear of each alarm and status cage. It
     accepts display data in a differential mode from the ASI card, decodes
     the display module address, and forwards the TTL display data to the
     ASLM and ASSM boards. It also provides an interface between the EMX and
     the customer audible and visual alarm circuitry. The board includes
     eight Form-C relays whose contacts may be configured either normally
     closed or open as required.

Alarm and Status Handler (ASH)
     A group of software processes that report the results of activities
     performed by devices which have been affected by maintenance commands,
     as well as reports changes in service states due to failures and
     reports changes in the base site controller mobile communications
     interface via the Alarm and Status Panels (ASP) RF channel display.
     These processes use translation tables for the generation of
     teleprinter messages and activating lights on the Alarm and Status
     Panel (ASP) LED displays.

Alarm and Status Interface (ASI)
     Two ASI cards are used in the Maintenance and Status Unit (MSU). One
     ASI card is associated with the Maintenance Processor (MPROC) and the
     other with the System Status Register (SSR). There are two main
     functions provided by the ASI board. The first is to provide a Watchdog
     Timer (WDT) to the processor with which it is associated. Secondly, ASI
     provides TTL to differential conversion and multiplexes the display
     address and data information to the Alarm and Status Electronics Board
     (ASEB) or Alarm and Status Electronics Relay Board (ASERB).

Alarm and Status Lamp Module (ASLM)
     A card in the Alarm and Status Panel (ASP) which provides alarm and
     system status displays under control of the Maintenance and Status Unit
     (MSU).

Alarm and Status Panel (ASP)
     An indicating display which has specific information concerning the
     state of alarms and status in the system.

Alarm and Status Switch Module (ASSM)
     A card in the alarm and status panel which provides alarm and system
     status displays under control of the Maintenance and Status Unit (MSU).
     This card also provides facilities for manually operated switch inputs
     to the system.

Alarm Maintenance Multiplexer (AMM-1)
     Serial digital I/O interface which monitors all power supplies, fuses,
     circuit breaker distribution, and the system power plant. Also provides
     audible and visual alarm indications.

Alarm Management
     A subsystem that provides reference information on monitoring and
     managing alarms and events from the Craft Workstation that occur on the
     TSCP-2000 node.

Alarm Message
     A printed report on the system maintenance teleprinter indicating a
     status change, reconfiguration or alarm of a component of the EMX. Some
     alarm messages may be accompanied by changes in the Alarm and Status
     Panel light display.

Alarm Multiplex Communication Adapter-1 (AMCA-1)
     Board Provides the interface between the AMM-1 and COM-1 Boards and
     controls the audible alarm.

Alarm Relay Interface (ARI) Card
     The ARI card is the interface between the EMX and the customer audible
     and visual alarm circuitry. This board incorporates the watchdog timer
     circuitry and functions as if it were two Alarm and Status Interface
     (ASI) circuits on one board except the address and data information
     controls relays rather than displays. The board provides eight Form-C
     relays. Contacts may be configured for normally open or normally
     closed, as required by the customer interface. (These boards have been
     deleted in later systems.)

Alarm MUX
     A serial interface device for monitoring inputs and outputs. It
     consists of an alarm multiplex communication adapter (AMCA) and up to
     128 alarms maintenance multiplexers (AMM). The AMCA is controlled via a
     COMM-1 on the maintenance bus. Typically, each equipment frame houses
     one AMM. One output of each AMM is connected to a frame fault light. An
     output of one of the AMMs is reserved for the audible alarms and three
     outputs of another for the alarm lights. Inputs are used to monitor
     miscellaneous alarm conditions at each frame.

Alarm Panel
     A device mounted to the front of one of the equipment frames. It
     contains the audible and visual alarms.

Alarm Status
     The status of an alarm is either ON, OFF, acknowledged (ACK), or
     unacknowledged (UNACK).

Alarm Reports
     Printed output resulting from hardware or software fault conditions.
     Reports are formatted by teleprinter executive software and printed at
     assigned teleprinters.

Alarm Severity
     One of five levels of severity associated with an ALARM, STATUS or
     RECON message printed on the system maintenance teleprinter. The level
     of alarm severity of the message is indicated by the presence of 0 to 4
     asterisks preceding the alarm message, as follows:

   * Major 1
     System is down, all call processing capability lost (****).

   * Major 2
     Loss of major components. Some call processing capability lost (***).

   * Minor 1
     Loss of redundant component, no call processing capability lost (**).

Alarm Status OFF
     The condition for which the alarm is defined is not happening. No
     audible or visual alarms are turned on for this alarm number.

Alarm Status ON
     The condition for which the alarm is defined exists. The audible alarm
     (if required for this alarm) and the visual alarm have been turned on
     for this alarm.

   * Minor 2
     Loss of minor redundant component, no call processing capability lost
     (*).

   * None
     No alarm severity.

Alarm Subsystem
     Consists of the Maintenance Processor, COM-1 board, AMCA, and several
     AMM-1 modules.

Alarm Text
     The character string displayed on the CAMP terminal which is a unique,
     brief description of the alarm condition.

Alarm Type
     Miscellaneous or the subsystem which produced the alarm condition. The
     subsystems which produce internal alarms are Common Control Equipment
     (CONTRO), Switch Matrix Equipment (NETWOR), Trunk Equipment (TRUNKS),
     Service Equipment (SVCKTS), or Automatic Message Accounting (AMA), and
     Miscellaneous (MISC).

Alarm Type Status
     For each alarm type, this is the number of minor, major, or
     catastrophic alarms that are ON, and the number of unacknowledged
     alarms.

A-Law
     An encoding format for the quantization and digitization of analog
     signals into PCM signals and recovery of analog signals from Pulse Code
     Modulation (PCM) signals. A-Law specifies parameters for compression
     and re-expansion of the signal during transmission and processing.
     A-Law PCM encoding is used in 30-channel EMX systems (see also Mu-Law).

A-Law PCM
     Logarithmic companding algorithm used for speech coding in Europe.

Algorithm
     An ordered sequence of mathematical steps that produces an answer to a
     problem, although the solution may be more lengthy than necessary.

Allocation bitmap
     A table on the disk that indicates each block usage.

All Trunks Busy (ATB)
     This is a condition of the telephone switching system where all paths
     to or from a particular exchange are occupied. In such cases the caller
     normally receives a rapid busy tone (also 120 ipm).

ALM
     See Analog Line Module.

ALRM
     See Alarm Interface.

AMA
     (1) See Automatic Message Accounting Subsystem. (2) IPR log type for
     Automatic Message Accounting Subsystem IPRs.

AMC
     See Alarm Multiplexer Controller.

AMCA
     See Alarm Mux Communication Adapter.

AMCA-1 Board
     See Alarm Multiplexer Communication Adapter-1 Board.

AMF
     Analog Maintenance Frame.

AMM
     See Alarm Maintenance Multiplexer.

AMM-1
     See Alarm Maintenance Multiplexer.

AMPS
     A Bell System acronym and registered service mark for their Advanced
     Mobile Phone Service. See Cellular System.

AMPS-DC
     Advanced Mobile Phone System-Digital Cellular as specified in IS-54.

AMR Card
     Alarm Monitoring and Reporting card. Located in the PDC of the RF Modem
     cabinet and in the XC. Used within the BTS to monitor and report
     alarms. Monitors up to 18 alarms sensors, reporting changes to the
     operator. Also supports up to eight control relay functions, activated
     by operator command.

Analog Color Code
     In DYNA TAC systems, an analog signal (see Supervisory Audio Tone)
     transmitted by a land station on a voice channel and used to detect
     capture of a mobile station by an interfering land station and/or the
     capture of a land station by an interfering mobile station.

Analog Line Module (ALM)
     Serves each line by a dedicated switch matrix channel without traffic
     concentrating.

Analog Recorded Announcement-1 (ARA-1)
     Board Provides analog-to-digital conversion and signaling control for
     up to 16 separately recorded announcement devices or channels.

Analog-to-Digital Converter (A/D)
     A device that converts a signal that is a function of a continuous
     variable into a representative number sequence carrying equivalent
     information.

ANI
     Automatic Number Identification. A DTMF data stream from the cellular
     switch. The data stream consists of a ten digit number. The ANI is used
     to identify the callee or the caller to the MCMC.

ANSI
     American National Standards Institute

Answer Signal
     The 2070 Hz tone transmitted by the called mobile to the international
     base site controller in OBL-B systems after the handset has been
     lifted. This signal causes the holding signal to be switched off, which
     then terminates ringing in the mobile. It also initiates connection of
     the audio path for conversation between the two parties.

Antenna
     A transmitter/receiver which converts electrical currents into RF and
     vice versa. In cellular systems, transmits and receives RF signals
     between the BTS and MS. May be configured for omni/omni, sector/sector,
     or omni/sector.

ANTMAT
     Antenna Matrix.

AOS
     See Automatically Out-of-Service.

API
     See Application Programming Interface.

Appearance
     A device (line, trunk, receiver, sender) location as it appears on the
     switch matrix.

Application Program
     A self-contained part of the system software which provides a specific
     function in a system.

Application Programming Interface (API)
     Provides common interface within the SC 9600 system. Includes
     transceiver operating system, board support, run time library, message
     routing, performance measurement, timer functions and data base
     management.

APPLSTAT
     Application verification macro that is executed after completion of an
     application installation, application upgrade or cold loading of the
     platform system. APPLSTAT checks for the existence of all required
     application processes.

APR
     Announcement Prior to Routing.

AR -Authentication Request.

AR
     Automatic Roaming.

ARA
     Analog Recorded Announcement.

ARA-1 Board
     See Analog Recorded Announcement-1 Board.

Area Code
     In the United States and Canada, the telephone system is divided up
     into number plan areas (NPAs). The area code is the three-digit number
     that is common to all telephone numbers in one of these areas. For
     example: The area code for Chicago is 312.

ARI
     Alarm Relay Interface

ARM
     Alarm Reset Module.

ARRT
     Addressable Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter.

ARQ
     Automatic Request for retransmission.

ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange)
     A data communication code set consisting of a 7-bit (8-bit compatible)
     binary code used to standardize the interchange of data (usually
     characters; both control and symbolic) between processing and
     communication equipment.

ASCII Encoded Messages
     American Standard for Information Interchange; code used by the EMX
     software that assigns specific bit patterns to each sign, symbol,
     numeral, letter, and operation.

ASEB
     Alarm and Status Electronics Board

ASERB
     Alarm and Status Electronics Relay Board

ASH
     Alarm and Status Handler

ASI
     Alarm Status Interface

ASIC
     Application Specific Integrated Circuit.

ASLM
     Alarm and Status Lamp Module

ASP
     1. Alarm Status Panel. 2. The Alarm Status Windows located across the
     top of the Craft Workstation Screen. They have specific information
     concerning the state of alarms and status in the system.
Assignment
     Designation of a transceiver tuned to a specific frequency for RF
     transmission.

ASSM
     Alarm and Status Switch Module

ASUMMARY
     Application Summary

ASU
     Antenna Select Unit. Part of the RFDS. Outputs test signals generated
     by the RFDS XCVR. Receives and selects input signals to be tested by
     the RFDS.

Asynchronous
     Not occurring, existing, or arising at the same time.

Asynchronous Communications Interface Adapter (ACIA)
     An integrated circuit in the Motorola 6800 microprocessor family that
     provides the data formatting and control to interface serial
     asynchronous data communications information to a bus organized system
     such as a microcomputer. Connects parallel-to-serial data and
     vice-versa.

Asynchronous Communications Interface-1 (COM-1) Board
     1) The interface between a Communication Processor (controlling
     microprocessor) and an asynchronous serial peripheral device. 2)
     Functions as an interface between a MP (processor) and a single channel
     transmit and receive serial asynchronous RS-232 compatible peripheral.
     3) Communications interface between the Serial Device Driver and the
     CAMP terminals, when the Terminal Handler resides in the Comm
     processor.

ATB
     All Trunks Busy

ATM
     Asynchronous Transfer Mode.

ATP
     Alarm Transfer Process

ATT
     Automatic Trunk Test; see Automatic Trunk Test Program.

Attenuation
     The decrease in an energy level as a signal propagates through
     equipment, transmission lines or space, usually expressed in decibels.

Attenuator
     A device for reducing the energy level of a signal without introducing
     distortion. Also called a pad.

ATTS
     See Automatic Trunk Testing Subsystem.

AUC
     Authentication Center.

AUD
     See Audio Board.

Audible Alarm
     A device controlled by the alarm mux. It is sounded whenever there are
     unacknowledged alarms posted. Three distinct sound patterns are
     produced to correspond to minor, major, and catastrophic alarms. The
     audible alarm will reflect the most severe, unacknowledged alarm
     condition in the system. The audible alarm is controlled by an alarm
     mux output.

Audible Signal
     Tone signal directed to the telephone user's ear to indicate call
     progress and disposition, including, but not limited to congestion or
     All Trunks Busy (ATB), called party busy (or line busy tone
     60 ipm), ringback, and dial tone. Also called progress tones.

Audio Board (AUD)
     Conditions (and compands) the audio for connection to both RF equipment
     and telephone lines in DYNA TAC (cellular) systems, one AUD is
     installed for each voice channel at a base station.

AUDIT
     IPR log type for database related IPRs.

Audit
     An application program or process which investigates the integrity of
     specific data structures.

Audit Process
     A process which periodically deletes invalid subscriber records in
     order to maintain the accuracy of the associated databases.

AUI
     Attachment Unit Interface. A computer node interface.
Austria Total Access Communications System

(A-T.A.C.S.)
     Austrian implementation of the Total Access Communications System. Also
     see DYNA TAC and T.A.C.S.

Authentication Signal
     In OBL-B systems, the IBSC transmits the authentication signal after
     receiving the identification signal from the mobile. The mobile
     compares both these signals and, if they are not identical, the mobile
     is switched off the channel. Thus, the simultaneous occupation of one
     speaking channel by several mobiles (multiple seizures) is made
     impossible.

Automatic Message Accounting (AMA) Subsystem
     This subsystem is responsible for the establishment of collection
     thresholds and associated alarms; the establishment of the switching
     systems site identification number; definition and display of the
AMA
     batch files; dumping the AMA batch files to magnetic tape.

Automatic Number Identification (ANI)
     In mobile telephony, the term ANI usually refers to the code number
     which is automatically transmitted by the mobile telephone at the
     beginning of the placement of a call. Normally, this same code number
     is used as the selective call of the mobile telephone for receiving
     calls from the terminal. In the case of IMTS systems, this ANI number
     is seven digits long and in the United States telephone company market
     is made up of the area code and the last four numbers of the telephone
     number assigned to the mobile unit.

Automatic Out-of-Service
     A state set by the Fault Isolation Subsystem (FISO) when a detected
     device problem prevents access by normal system functions.

Automatic Roaming
     Capability for automatic routing of mobile terminated calls to a mobile
     in its currently registered area (used when the mobile is outside its
     home area).

Automatic Roaming
     This is the title given to the group of IS-41 general provisions that
     automatically provides cellular services to cellular subscribers who
     are operating their equipment while located outside their home service
     areas.

Automatic Time of Day Schedule
     A parameter in the test mobile data base that indicates which automatic
     tests are scheduled for each hour of the day. Contains the hour of the
     day and the corresponding test type.

Automatic Trunk Test Program (ATT)
     One of the two software programs resident in the Automatic Trunk
     Testing Subsystem.

Automatic Trunk Testing Subsystem (ATTS)
     Helps ensure the quality of telephone lines. This is accomplished by a
     series of tests, each with a specific purpose. The ATTS supports access
     and testing of any trunk that appears on the EMX 2500. Automatic trunk
     testing can be initiated by either an operator command or by a command
     file, which can be activated at a predetermined time.

Auto Restoral Task
     Initiates test on "failed" devices which are in the "auto restore"
     list. When a device is in the list, it is periodically tested by adding
     an entry to the FISO isolation test list.

+---+
| B |
+---+


Background
     The automatic execution of lower priority computer programs which are
     temporarily suspended when higher priority foreground programs are
     active.

Backplane
     Assembly in the rear of a card cage typically holding the circuit board
     connectors and interconnecting signal conductors.

Backup
     Permanent and semi-permanent data to enable quick restart in the event
     of a total system failure which requires reloading. Generally refers to
     magnetic tape copies of data and programs that reside on disks.

Bad Block
     A disk block that has a media problem on the disk drive that prevents
     it from faithfully recording information. The disk drive is able to
     select an alternate block to use in its place when directed by
     software.

Balanced Circuit
     A circuit in which two branches are electrically alike and symmetrical
     with respect to a common reference, usually ground. For an applied
     differential signal at the input, the signal relative to the reference
     at equivalent points in the two branches must be opposite in polarity
     and equal in amplitude.

BALUN
     Balanced/Unbalanced. A device which matches an unbalanced coaxial
     transmission line to a balanced two-wire system.

Bandit
     A mobile attempting to use an invalid or unauthorized mobile telephone
     number or operating method.

Bandit Flag
     A flag which can be inserted in the subscriber data base file which
     reports stolen mobiles.

Band Pass Filter
     Used to reduce wideband noise in the receiver band, out-of-band
     intermodulation levels, and carrier frequency harmonics. Required for
     omni/sector.

Base Control Unit (BCU)
     Used in Nordic systems to control a base station. It accepts commands
     from the Channel Signaling Interface (CSI) in Nordic format (e.g., key
     transmitter) and sends Nordic messages to the Channel Signaling
     Interface (CSI) (e.g., transmitter alarm). Under certain circumstances,
     a BCU can communicate with the Site Supervisory Unit (SSU) at the same
     site.

Base Node Number
     Number used to identify which nodes comprise a particular set of nodes
     in an EMX system. In a system with only one set of nodes the base node
     number is zero (0). Node 0 always defines the local node regardless of
     the number of sets of nodes. For example, a node in set #1 would be #1
     to a node in any other set and a node in set #2 would be node #2 to any
     other node. Base node numbers of interconnected EMXs with multiple
     nodes can range from 0 to 31. The base node number facilitates
     interprocessor communication.

Base Site
     The combination of base station and base station (site) controller,
     which together comprise one cell in a cellular telephone system.

Base Site Controller (BSC)
     The interface in DYNA TAC systems between the EMX switch and the base
     station transmitter and receiver.

Base-Site-Link Processor (BSLK)
     The lowest level processor in the Cellular Processing Subsystem. Its
     function is to handle communication between the EMX 2500 and the remote
     Base Site Controllers. It provides both the physical and logical
     connection between the cell site and the switch. It converts messages
     from the internal format of the switch to a serial form for translation
     to the cell sites.

Base Site Power Amplifier
     Used in the DYNA TAC base station to amplify the low level signal from
     the exciter for application to the antenna.

Base Station (BS)
     In cellular systems, the base station is made up of RF transmitters and
     receivers which communicate with cellular subscriber (mobile or
     portable) equipment. It provides the means to relay data and voice
     communications between subscriber equipment and base site controllers.

Batch File
     A sequence of blocks on the collection file which are referenced by a
     single name and entry in the batch file control table.

Batch File Control Table (BFCT)
     An external memory table whose entries are pointers to batch files
     (batch files on disk).

Batch File Display
     The command DISPLAY BATCH will provide valuable information about the
     collection of files to be searched.

Battery (Central Office)
     The negative voltage with respect to earth or chassis ground, that
     feeds power to telephone equipment.

Baud (also Baud Rate)
     A unit of signaling speed which is equal to the number of discrete
     conditions or signal events per second.

Bay
     Mechanical structure that supports the electronic equipment used in the
     EMX system. Also called a rack.

BCCH
     Broadcast Control Channel. A common access RF channel providing
     point-to-multipoint unidirectional signaling downlink. Used to
     broadcast general information about a BTS site on a per cell or sector
     basis.

BCD
     Binary Coded Decimal

BCH Code
     Bose-Chauhduri-Hocauenghem Code. An error correcting code sometimes
     used with data transmission equipment.

BCU Shelf
     See XC shelf.

Beginning of Tape (BOT)
     See Load Point.

BER
     Bit Error Rate.

Berry
     Refers to the Berry components of the transmission measurement set used
     in Radio Channel Test.

BERT
     Bit Error Rate Test.

BFCT
     See Batch File Control Table.

BHCA
     Busy Hour Call Attempt.

BHCCS
     Busy Hours Hundred Calls per Second.

BHL
     Busy Hour Loading.

BHW
     Baseline Hardware Document.

BIB
     Balanced-line Interface Board. Part of the XC. Terminates span line
     cables for the transcoder, interfacing external span lines and the
     MSIs. Mounted on top of the XC cabinet. Provides twelve balanced 100 to
     120-ohm lines coupled to the MSI through transformers.

BIC
     Backplane Interconnect Card.

Billing Data
     All call data collected during a telephone call. Includes: Seizure
     time, originating port number, mobile number, call classes, dialed
     digits, direction indicator, connection indicator, home/roam indicator,
     answer time, disconnect time, timeouts, midnight indicator, and manual
     time change. (Refer to Operator's Manual for exact format.)

Billing Records
     Three types including:

   * Call Records
     one per call with the above billing data.

   * Transmit Records
     one per use of the dedicated trunks between two EMX systems.

   * Subscriber Options Records
     one per option used, initiated, or canceled (see your Operator's Manual
     for record layouts).


Binary
     Pertaining to a characteristic or property involving a selection,
     choice, or conditions in which there are two and only two
     possibilities.

Binary Coded Decimal (BCD)
     A format used to encode the 10 decimal characters into standard 8-4-2-1
     weighted 4-bit binary characters. The remaining 4-bit binary
     combinations (decimal values 10-15) are disallowed. See also Packed
     BCD.

Bipolar
     A format for transmission over differential line pairs where a pulse of
     equal positive (on one line) and negative (on the other line) amplitude
     represents one binary state and the absence of a pulse represents the
     other binary state.

BIS
     Busy/Idle State

Bit
     An abbreviation for binary digit. A binary digit is a character used to
     represent one of the two states or digits (0 or 1) in the numeration
     system with a radix of two. Also, a unit of storage capacity.
Bits Per Second (bps)
     A measure of data transmission speed. The number of binary characters
     (1's or 0's) transmitted in one second. For example, an eight-bit
     parallel transmission link which transfers one character (eight bits)
     per second is operating at 8 bps.

Block
     1) A group of bits (binary digits) transmitted as a unit, over which a
     parity check procedure is applied for error control purposes. 2) The
     smallest unit of data that may be recorded on tape.

Block Count
     The number of data blocks written to a DAS tape. There are 2 separate
     block counts:

   * The count used by the tape management records is a daily count which is
     reset at midnight. This count is also reset when a tape is activated
     manually (does not take over from another tape). This tape will start
     with a header record instead of a transfer record.
   * The count maintained on a per-tape basis. This count is used in the IBM
     trailer labels at the end of a tape.

Block Descriptor Word
     The 32 bits at the beginning of each data block written onto a DAS
     tape. The more significant 16 bits represent the block length (in
     binary form). The less significant 16 bits are loaded with zeros.

Blocking
     The inability of the calling subscriber to be connected to the called
     subscriber because either (a) all paths are busy, or (b) because idle
     paths in the calling group cannot access idle paths in the called
     group.

BNC
     Bayonet-Neill-Concilman connector. This style connector is used for the
     thin Ethernet interface on the MC system.

   * Board A PCB or such that is bolted, screwed, or secured in some fashion
     to a rack/frame or other piece of hardware.

BOM
     Bill Of Materials.

BOT
     Beginning of Tape

Bootstrap Loader
     A routine whose first instructions are sufficient to load the remainder
     of itself into memory from an input device and (normally) initialize a
     complex system of programs.

BPROC
     BSC Processor Card (IMTS)

bps
     Bits Per Second

BR
     Bus Repeater

Bridging Connection
     A connection across or in parallel with another circuit, generally of
     high impedance so that the circuit is not loaded by the bridging
     connection.

Brief Text
     A brief description of the error condition that caused an IPR to be
     sent.

BRSAS
     Bus Repeater and System Alarm Status

BRTD
     Bus Repeater Tone Detector.

BS
     Base Station

BSC
     Base Site Controller

BSC Messages
     In IMTS systems, formatted messages transmitted between the Switch
     Control Unit and BSC via the multiple terminal interface card/multiple
     line interface card. In DYNA TAC systems, formatted messages
     transmitted between the channel control processor and BSC via Serial
     Communications Interface Peripheral (SCIP) cards.

BSD
     Berkeley Systems Design. A variant of UNIX.

BSEL
     See Bus Select.

BSLK
     See Base-Site-Link Processor.

BSS
     Base Station System. Consists of one CBSC and associated BTSs;
     represents the fixed end of the radio interface for an SC 9600 cellular
     system. Provides control and radio coverage functions.

BSSAP
     BSS Application Part. Protocol for LAPD or LAPB signaling links on the
     A-interface. Comprised of DTAP and BSSMAP messages. Supports message
     communication between the MSC and BSS.

BSSMAP
     BSS Management Application Part. Call processing protocol for
     A-interface messages exchanged between the MSC and BSS. The BSS
     interprets these messages.

BSW
     Baseline Software Document.

BSY
     Busy

BT
     Bus Terminator.

BT1
     See Universal Bus Terminator.

BT-3 Board
     See Bus Terminator-3 Board.

BTA
     Bus Terminator Arbitrator.

BTC
     Bus Terminator Card. Part of the XC. Provides high-speed bus
     termination on the XC backplane.

BTR
     Bus Terminator

BTS
     RF Base Transceiver Station, representing one cell. Part of the BSS.
     Comprised of the SIF, RF Modem, and LPA cabinets. Provides the standard
     radio transceiver functions for the air interface.

BTS site
     The location of a particular BTS.

BTSDS0
     BTS Digital Synch Signal 0.

BTSLINK
     FEP-BTS Control Link.

BTSNCON
     BTS Link Nailed Connection.

BTSSPAN
     BTS Span.

Buffer
     1) A temporary storage device for data which cannot be used or
     retransmitted immediately. Buffers may be used on a network for error
     checking, for store and forward, or to compensate for a difference in
     the rate of flow of data when transmitted from one device to another.
     2) A device used as an interface between two circuits or equipments to
     reconcile their incompatibilities or to prevent variations in one from
     affecting the other. 3) A circuit used for transferring data from one
     unit to another when temporary storage is required because of different
     operating speeds or occurrence timing. 4) In software, memory area
     allocated for use by application programs.

Bus
     One or more conductors used for transmitting signals or power from one
     or more sources to one or more destinations.

Bus Repeater and System Alarm and Status (BRSAS)
     In DYNA TAC systems, a multi-function board which buffers backplane
     input/output bus signals from the upper backplane of a half node to the
     lower backplane of the second half node. This allows a processor to
     interface to all dual ported peripherals and associated circuits.
     Inputs are latched and the board can be programmed to interrupt the
     processor on alarm and status conditions. On board termination to the
     backplane is also supplied to provide impedance matching and
     termination of backplane bus signals. BRSAS cards reside in all
     processor nodes.

Bus Select (BSEL)
     A bus select signal is provided for each of the eight subordinate buses
     accessed by the associated Matrix Control Bus. This permits the
     selection of any combination of the subordinate buses on any bus cycle.
     Bus select signals are derived from the subsystem select register and
     the A/B select register on the SMP boards. A "low" on a bus select
     signal selects the associated subordinate control bus for the current
     cycle.

Bus Terminator (BTR) Card
     A special card to provide impedance matching and termination of
     backplane bus signals. The BTR card plugs directly over the backplane
     wirewrap pins.

Bus Terminator-3 (BT-3) Board
     Functions as a bus terminator and tester; clock and frame
     tester-arbitrator; bus arbitrator; error accumulator, and supports
     digital output operation for buses associated with the T1 Digital
     Interface Unit.

Busy-Idle Bits
     In DYNA TAC systems, the portion of the data stream transmitted by a
     land station on a forward control channel that is used to indicate the
     currently busy-idle status of the corresponding reverse control
     channel.

Busy/Idle State (BIS)
     In DYNA TAC systems, identifies whether a mobile station must check for
     an idle-to-busy transition on a reverse control channel when accessing
     a system. See Numeric Information.

Busy Transfer
     A feature that allows calls to a mobile to be forwarded only if the
     mobile is busy with another call.

Busy Transfer Processing
     If this feature is activated and the mobile is not busy, the call is
     treated as a normal mobile termination. Otherwise, the call is
     transferred to the forward-to number.

BVL
     Basic Validation.

Byte
     A sequence of adjacent binary digits operated upon as a unit. Generally
     consists of eight bits, usually presented in parallel. A byte is
     usually the smallest addressable unit of information in a data store on
     memory. See also Octet.

BZT
     See Busy Transfer.

+---+
| C |
+---+

C7
     CCITT Signaling System Number 7. See also Signaling System 7.

C7LINK
     C7 Link.

C/I
     See CIR.

CAC
     Common Access Channel. A control channel, such as the BCCH, CCCH (PCH
     or SCCH) or UPCH.

CACR
     Common Access Channel
     Redundant.

CACRF
     Common Access Channel
     RF.

Cage
     See shelf.

Calibrate
     A procedural modifier for a telephony state. Indicates the device is in
     the process of initializing and is required to perform Cold Convergence
     Calibration during its initialization.

CALL
     IPR log type for call processing IPRs.

Call Class
     See Call Final Class.

Call Class Indicator
     Two-digit indicator in the call record showing the type of call and the
     reason the call was routed to a message, tone, or operator if the call
     could not be completed.

Call Confirmation Signal
     The 1950 Hz tone transmitted by the mobile to OBL-B systems to the IBSC
     after the selective call has been successfully decoded. This signal
     advises the EMX that the called mobile is operational and ready to
     receive the holding signal, this signal also causes ringback tone to be
     returned to the calling party.

Calling Channel
     Common channel used throughout OBL-B system to selectively call the
     mobile units. In the idle condition, all mobile receivers are switched
     to this frequency. Mobile units cannot transmit on this frequency.
     Calling channel operation is controlled by the EMX after trunk seizure
     on a land-initiated call.

Call Detail Records (CDR)
     Detailed information concerning a call processing event, an entry in a
     batch file. This data consists of all the information needed to bill
     the customer for the call and facility usage data for the call. A
     fixed-length record which contains the necessary information to
     generate customer billing and provides certain facility usage.

Call Diversion
     The act of routing a calling party to something other than the called
     number, usually progress tones, a message recorder, or an operator.

Call Failure Class
     See Call Final Class.

Call Final Class (CFC)
     The status of a call upon completion, identified by a pre-defined
     two-hex-digit code (00-FF). Examples of CFCs include normal completion
     to or from a home subscriber, terminating mobile was busy, insufficient
     dialed digits, and many more. Call treatments can be assigned to each
     CFC. Sometimes called Call Failure Class or Call Class.

Call Forwarding
     A feature available to the mobile telephone user whereby, after
     initiation of the feature by an authorized subscriber, calls dialed to
     the mobile telephone of an authorized subscriber will automatically be
     routed to the desired number.

Call Management Subsystem
     Manages trunk circuits, collects data, performs data base translations,
     and supervises and controls all the events and tasks required for
     processing calls through the EMX 2500.

Call Processing
     A distributed process by which an entire EMX accepts, routes, disposes
     of, and generates statistics and billing information on every telephone
     call passing through it (whether or not the call is completed).

Call Processing Manager (CPM)
     Consists of dual MP-8 processors and is a slave to the Admin Manager,
     and a master to the Call Manager Extension Processors and Cellular
     Network Manager. The CPM has direct access to its own duplexed external
     shared memory. Its functions include: Maintaining the idle lists of
     circuits in each trunk group and use of these lists in route selection;
     collect the Call Detail Record (CDR) data for each telephone call and
     distribute completed CDRs to the Admin Manager, and collect Traffic
     Metering and Measurement (TMM) data for trunk groups and called numbers
     and distribute the TMM data to the Admin Manager.

Call Processing Manager Extension (CPM-E, CPE, CPMX)
     Controls the fourth highest level bus in the distributed control
     hierarchy. Slave to Call Processing Manager; Master to the Line Trunk
     Managers, Service Managers, Translation Processor, and Mobile Control
     Manager. Handles tandem message traffic between these processors. It
     offloads the CPM of tandem message traffic between the originating and
     terminating line trunk manager or cell group manager. It contains
     copies of the programs required for loading the line trunk processor
     and line trunk manager.

Call Processing Program
     Software that controls the switching network in an electronic switching
     system.

Call Processing Subsystem
     A subsystem of the EMX 2500 which handles all calls flowing through the
     switch (from request for service through disconnect) and passes a CDR
     to AMA for billing purposes.

Call Processing Trunk Data Base
     Maintains the equipped status of a trunk with respect to the call
     processing and trunk group to which the trunk is assigned.

Call Record
     A record stored on a DAS tape containing the overall timing
     information, mobile number, dialed digits, and appropriate indicators
     to ticket a call for every call completed or attempted through the EMX.

Call Routing File
     An optional file consisting of stored tables that are used to generate
     a primary and alternate route into the land network for mobile
     originating calls.

Call Treatment
     Audio provided to callers, used to indicate the ultimate result of a
     call attempt. Treatments include progress tones (e.g., ringback, busy,
     click-tone) and recorded announcements.

Call Waiting
     A subscriber feature which allows an individual mobile telephone user
     currently engaged in a call to be alerted that another caller is trying
     to reach him. The user has a predetermined period of time in which to
     terminate the existing conversation and respond to the second call.

Calling Channel (CC)
     Used in Nordic systems to designate a channel used for call set-up to
     mobile subscribers. Under certain conditions the CC can be used as
     traffic channels.

CAMP
     See Configuration (Control), Administration and Maintenance Position.

CAMP Function
     This is two CRTs (expandable to 16) dedicated to the control function
     and maintenance function. This provides password security;
     password-based command level screening; operator prompts, and a help
     facility. The CAMP can have a local or remote location but is always
     external to the switch.

Campon (CMPN)
     A job is in campon state when it is waiting for a piece of hardware or
     another resource to become available. In this priority state, the
     resource is marked so that no other job can get access to the resource
     before the job in campon state.

CAMP Terminal
     CRT-type terminal with an optional printer. It provides password
     security, command level screening based on password, brief or verbose
     output, and a HELP facility. Also see Configuration (Control),
     Administration and Maintenance Position.

Cancellation
     Function used to disable any previously requested special service
     functions dialed by the mobile telephone subscriber.

Card
     Generally refers to a printed circuit board. Also called board.

Card Cage
     The card cage is that part of the equipment that holds the printed
     circuit cards.

Carrier Circuit
     A system where many different conversations are combined on a single
     pair of wires or a single radio channel in such a manner as they may
     take place simultaneously without interfering with each other.

Carrier/Country Code Digit Table (CCDIG)
     A multi-purpose table used in the Outward Translation process. When
     Carrier Override is in effect, this table provides the Logical Route 1
     to get a carrier to use for the call. Also, in the USA for "Feature
     Group D" calls, this table determines a portion of the outpulsed
     digits.

Carrier ID
     The three digit number assigned to a (long-distance) carrier. These
     three digits are the "XXX" in 10XXX preferred-carrier dialing. Up to
     100 carriers can be defined in a system. Also see Carrier Index.

Carrier Index
     A two digit index used internally to identify each defined carrier.
     Also see Carrier ID.

Carrier Override
     A parameter that may be specified in the Outward Translation process.
     When present in the Physical Route table, it means that a specified
     long-distance carrier will always be used to complete calls to this
     particular route instead of any Preferred Carrier or Presubscribed
     Carrier. When present in the Carrier Route table, the carrier specified
     will be used in the event that the subscriber's preferred or
     presubscribed carrier is unable to complete the call.

Carrier Route (CARRTE)
     In the Outward Translation process, a termination route which sends a
     call to an external carrier. Used for long-distance calls, or other
     calls which can not be completed with trunks directly accessible by the
     EMX. Subscribers may have a particular carrier pre-selected, or may
     specify one when dialing; otherwise, a default carrier is used.

CARRTE
     See Carrier Route.

CAS
     Channel Associated Signalling. The E1 signalling used in the MCMC in
     the 1.2.1.0 software release or later.

CAT
     Cellular Application Terminal.

Catastrophic Outage
     The class of outage that affects service to a moderate number of
     circuits originating or terminating on the EMX 2500 system.
     Catastrophic outages occur when more than 25% of the originating and/or
     terminating circuits cannot complete a call or more than 25% of the
     originating and/or terminating calls are mishandled. Also see Major
     Outage, Minor Outage.

Cavity Filter
     Used in the DYNA TAC base station to selectively filter the output of
     the power amplifiers.

CBI Board
     See Control Bus Interface Board.

CBI Timing Bus Failure (CBICF)
     If a timing bus failure occurs in the subsystem in which the CBI
     resides, the SMP is not able to access the CBI to determine which
     subsystem reported the failure. The active low CBICF signal is provided
     so this condition can be reported to the SMP by the CBI boards.

CBICF
     See CBI Timing Bus Failure.

CBSC
     Centralized Base Station Controller. Part of the BSS. Consists of the
     Mobility Manager and Transcoder. Provides BTS cluster control,
     switching, traffic concentration, and transcoding functions.

CC
     Carrier Cancellation.

CC
     Color Code.

CC
     Common control.

CCA
     Call Processing Conflict Audits.

CCB
     Configuration control bus.

CCCH
     Common Control Channel. A common access RF channel providing
     point-to-multipoint bi-directional signaling up- and downlink. Used to
     control paging and grant access. Includes the PCH and SCCH. Commonly
     used with the UPCH.

CCDIG
     See Carrier/Country Code Digit Table.

CCE
     Channel Coordination Processor Extension

CCEP
     Channel Coordination Processor Extension Power

CCE/MSU
     Channel Coordination Processor Extension/ Maintenance and Status Unit

CCF
     See Common Control Frame.

CCIR
     An abbreviation for International Radio Consultative Committee. One of
     the permanent organizations of the International Telecommunication
     Union (ITU).

CCIS
     Common Channel Interoffice Signaling

CCITT
     An abbreviation for International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative
     Committee. An international organization concerned with devising and
     proposing recommendations for international communications. One of the
     permanent organizations of the International Telecommunication Union
     (ITU).

CCITT No. 7 (C7, C7S)
     A method of Common Channel Signaling for voice and non-voice services
     in a digital environment. Signaling information is sent at 64 kbps.
     Used internationally. Also see Common Channel Signaling, T1.

CCM
     Credit Card Mobile.

CCP
     Channel Coordination Processor

CCS
     1. Common Channel Signaling. 2. Call Completion Service. The service
     supplied by the EMX 2500, BSCs, NAMPS subscriber units, and the MCMC.
     The EMX provides message delivery services to the subscriber unit.

CCS (100 Call Seconds)
     A measure of traffic load obtained by multiplying the number of calls
     per hour by the average holding time per call expressed in seconds, and
     dividing by 100. Often used in practice to mean hundred call seconds
     per hour with "per hour" implied; as such, it is a measure of traffic
     intensity.

CCSAN
     CCS Active Notification.

CCS7
     Common Channel Signaling #7.

CCT
     See Collection Control Table.

CCW
     Cancel Call Waiting.

CDF
     Configuration Data File. A file of current configuration and telephony
     status data generated for the OMC-R and each CBSC and BTS, based on the
     OMC-R Configuration Database. Used during initialization. Also called
     Cell-site Data File.

CDL
     Call Data Log.

CDMA
     Code Division Multiple Access as defined in IS-95.

CDMP
     Cellular Digital Message Protocol. An application protocol used for
     communication between an IP and thr MR.

CDMS
     Cellular Digital Message Service. The service supplied by the EMX 2500,
     BSCs, NAMPS subscriber units, and the MCMC. The MCMC provides message
     delivery services to the subscriber unit.

CDP
     Clock Distribution and Parity

CDR
     See Call Detail Record.

Cell
     The RF coverage area in radiotelephone system resulting from the
     operation of a single multi-channel set of base station equipment. This
     term can also be used to describe the base site equipment servicing
     this area.

Cell Group Manager (CGM)
     The processor that supports the cellular subsystem software.
     Redundant-pair CGMs reside on the MCM bus and control up to 26 BSLKs.
     It handles all signaling between the switch and the cell sites to
     coordinate the use of trunk circuits to the cell site radio equipment.
     A maximum of six CGM pairs are supported.

Cell Site
     The location of a BTS.

Cell Site Controller (CSC)
     A microprocessor-based, multiple-function card used to coordinate the
     activities of the cell site equipment. It also provides the cell site
     interface with the EMX switching equipment via a modem data link.

Cellular Call Processing Subsystem
     A subsystem of the EMX 2500 which communicates with the BSCs to
     coordinate and control the use of radio channels by BSCs and mobile
     units. Motorola's cellular portion of the Call Processing Subsystem.

Cellular Fault Management (CFM)
     The EMX 2500 software subsystem responsible for detecting and analyzing
     base site failures, including the process designed to reconfigure the
     cell to restore normal operation.

Cellular Group Manager Processor
     See Cell Group Manager.

Cellular Network Link (CNLK)
     A data connection between an EMX and another EMX. The datalinks use the
     LAPB protocol of CCITT standard X.25. In an EMX 2500, up to four
     cellular network link processors are under the control of each Cellular
     Network Processor (CNP). Each CNLK processor is an SFCC board (four
     datalinks each) making for a maximum of 64 cellular network links. Also
     see Link.

Cellular Network Manager (CNM)
     A redundant processor pair which oversees cellular network (DMX)
     communications. The CNM is subordinate to the Call Processing Manager,
     and controls up to four Cellular Network Processors.

Cellular Network Processor (CNP)
     A redundant processor pair which controls up to four Cellular Network
     Link Processors. An EMX 2500 can have up to four CNPs. The CNPs are
     subordinate to the Cellular Network Manager.

Cellular Subsystem
     Refers to those portions of the EMX 2500 that are used for cellular
     telephony, and not present in the base DSC DEX product. The cellular
     subsystem hardware consists of the Mobile Control Manager, Cellular
     Network Manager, and their subordinate processors, plus those Line
     Trunk Managers designated as mobile trunks and their subordinate
     processors.

Cellular System
     A fully automatic, wide-area, high-capacity radiotelephone system made
     up of a group of RF coverage areas called cells. As a subscriber passes
     from cell-to-cell, a series of handoffs maintain smooth call
     continuity. DYNA TAC, AMPS, and T.A.C.S. are examples of leading
     cellular systems.

Central Office (CO)
     The central office comprises a switching network and its control and is
     a facility whose communication common carrier terminates customer lines
     and locates the equipment for interconnecting those lines.

Central Processing Unit (CPU)
     A node or a system of nodes which provides processing capability to
     control call connections and provides call information within the EMX
     system.

CES
     Control Extension and Switch

CES
     Common Equipment Shelf. See PDC.

CFB (Call Forwarding on Busy)
     A cellular calling feature which forwards a call to a new number if the
     terminating party is busy.

CF
     See Call forwarding.

CFC (Call Failure Class)
     A hexadecimal number representing a specific failure mode.

CFM
     See Cellular Fault Management.

CFN (Call Forwarding on No Reply)
     A cellular calling feature which forwards a call to a new phone number,
     if there is no reply by the terminating party.

CFU (Call Forwarding Unconditional)
     A cellular calling feature which always forwards a call to a new number
     regardless of the nature of the call.

CGC
     Channel Group Concentrator

CGM
     See Cell Group Manager.

CGSA
     Cellular Geographic Service Area

CGSA-H
     See Home Area.

Change Journal
     The final segment of a system tape that contains records that log all
     recent change or SIM commands so that they will be re-entered into the
     system automatically if it is reloaded from tape.

Change Messages
     Standard formatted messages used by recent change software to activate
     programs that update subscriber or system data bases.

Changes (Subscriber and System)
     User specified changes, selected subscriber feature options,or changes
     to the equipment installed in the EMX system.

CHAN
     The base site device that controls a Voice Channel. Used in both HD and
     LD-type base stations. Also see Voice Channel.

Channel
     1) A particular member of a group that is associated with a unique time
     slot. Each member is associated with one port in the switch; either and
     RF channel, a land trunk, a three-party conference circuit, or a tone
     signaling port. 2) A particular member of an RF group that has a unique
     frequency.

Channel
     For a TDMA air interface, it describes the unique frequency and time
     slot allocation for a single call.

Channel Bank
     Equipment which converts a digital T1 signal to 24 or 30 individual
     analog circuits and, conversely, converts the signals from the analog
     circuits to the T1 format signal.

Channel Clear Message
     A message from the Base Site Controller (BSC) indicating that the
     carrier has been dropped at the end of a call and that the channel is
     now clear and is available to receive transmissions.

Channel Control
     Software package that controls the radio channel interface for call
     processing.

Channel Coordination Extension (CCE)
     Extension cage connected to the Channel Coordination Processor (CCP)
     node to provide expansion slots for peripheral cards, in particular,
     the Serial Communications Interface Peripheral (SCIP) card.

Channel Coordination Processor (CCP)
     Twin processor cage that performs similar functions related to the
     mobile channel control in a Nordic or DYNA TAC system:

   * In Nordic (NMT) systems, the CCP manages the channels in the same cell
     (site). This includes channel allocation (calling, traffic, etc.) and
     interfaces between the other nodes in the system. The CCP coordinates
     handoffs and the Mobile Communications Interface (MCI).
   * In DYNA TAC systems, the channels in every cell site are under the
     control of Base Site Controllers, including channel allocation. The CCP
     function then is to interface the DYNA TAC Base Site Controller (BSC)
     with other nodes, and to coordinate cell-to-cell handoffs. See Node.

Channel and Device State Tables
     Entries in the data base that contain channel numbers and device IDs
     and indicate the current service condition of each channel and device
     in the system.

Channel Group Concentrator (CGC)
     Used in Nordic and IMTS systems to interface between the Channel
     Coordination Processor (CCP) and the RF channel (i.e., channel
     signaling interface cards).

Channel Port
     See Port.

Channel Seizure Signal
     A signal sent by a mobile on a particular channel to seize that
     channel.

Channel Signaling Bay
     In a cellular system, a hardware frame that houses up to three channel
     signaling unit cages and the associated power supplies.

Channel Signaling Interface (CSI)
     The CSI has three functions:

   * Voice path interface between the radio channels and the switch (i.e.,
     channel banks).
   * Radio channel control, i.e., handles the signaling to/from the Base
     Control Unit, Site Supervisory Unit, and mobile subscriber.
   * Data interface coordination between the radio channel and the Channel
     Control Processor (via Channel Group Concentrator), including
     translation to/from Nordic signaling. (In Nordic systems, one CSI card
     controls two radio channels.)

Channel Signaling Unit (CSU)
     Used in Nordic and IMTS systems. This is a cage that houses one Channel
     Control Processor card and its associated Channel Signaling Interface
     cards.

Channel/Trunk Group Numbers
     Number assignments used to identify the individual RF channels and
     telephone company trunks that are part of a particular EMX system and
     Central Office, respectively. Channels and trunk members are stored in
     data base tables which maintain the status of each member.

Channels, Maximum (CMAX)
     In DYNA TAC systems, the maximum number of channels to be scanned by a
     mobile station when accessing a system. See Numeric Information.

Character
     Any group of binary digits which represents a mark, letter, numeral,
     signal or symbol.

Charge Meter
     A device optionally installed in mobile telephones that provides a
     visual indication of the cost of a call. The charges displayed are
     controlled by the EMX 2500; use of a purchasable Special Product
     (either Fixed Charge Rate or Variable Charge Rate) is required.

Checkpointing
     The activity that concerns the transferring of data or messages from
     active to standby processors of the control system. The checkpointing
     function is used to maintain identical write-protected data files (such
     as subscriber files) on both sides of the EMX Control System. Data are
     checkpointed periodically, as required, and only processed data is
     checkpointed. When checkpointing is turned-on, information is updated
     in write-protected memory on the active side of the EMX, identical data
     are entered into the corresponding write-protected memory on the other
     side. The checkpointing function is turned on or off automatically by
     the operating software depending upon the current and previous states
     of the processors. For example, checkpointing is not desired and is
     turned off when the two processing systems ("A" side and "B" side)
     contain different operating software or when a side is being loaded
     with new software.

CHGPIN
     Change PIN.

CHI bus
     Concentration Highway Interface bus. A digital bus within the BTS with
     nine TDM channels to carry control and traffic data between the GLI and
     transceiver. Operates at 2.048 Mbps.

Child
     A device which is enabled/controlled by a higher level device.

CIR
     Carrier-to-Interference Ratio.

CKF
     See Timing Bus Failure.

CKT
     Circuit.

Class
     Refers to a non-device, such as Software Load Management or MM Fault
     Management.

Class of Outage
     The type classification of a system outage. The three types of system
     outages are: catastrophic, major, and minor.

Class of Service
     A parameter in the subscriber data base which records the type of
     service to which a customer is limited, e.g., local dialing or
     international dialing.

Clearing Signal
     A signal sent by a system to a mobile, to turn it off for a system
     related reason.

Clear-to-Send (CTS)
     A handshake signal used with communication links, especially EIA
     RS-232C or CCITT Rec. V.24, to indicate (to a transmitter from a
     receiver) that transmission may proceed. Generated in response to a
     request-to-send signal. (Also see Request-to-Send.)

CLCI
     Common Language Circuit Identifier

CLI
     Calling Line Identification. A CLI is the telephone number of the
     calling party automatically transmitted by the switch. The CLI buffer
     in the mobile unit is used for digital pages, not CLIs.

CLI
     Command Line Interface. A user interface accessed at the OMC-R, as well
     as at the MM and BTS via the LMF. Provides a typed text command and
     response interface for the operator. Contrast to GUI.

CLID
     Calling Line ID.

CLI Dialog Session
     The time interval between invoking and concluding CLI activity.

Click Tone
     A particular progress tone used within a telephone system sounding like
     a click. It is injected into a subscriber's audio, typically whenever
     that particular call is in a waiting or holding mode for an electrical
     or timing reason. It indicates to the subscriber that the call has not
     been abandoned by the telephone network.

CLIR
     CLI Presentation Restricted.

CLK
     Time Clock.

CLKX Card
     Clock Extender card. Part of the XC. Distributes GCLK clock and
     reference signals to each XC shelf.

CLLI
     Common Language Location Identifier

CLM
     Communications LAN Module. A hardware component (board) located in the
     Tandem ST-2000.

CLNCLR
     Clone Clear.

Clock
     A device that generates periodic signals used for system
     synchronization.

Clock Card (CLK)
     The clock card generates system Clock (CLK) and Reference (REF) signals
     which it distributes differentially to the Switch Control Unit (SCU),
     Switch Unit (SWU), Group Multiplexer Unit (GMU) for Tone Signaling Unit
     (TSU).

Clock Distribution and Parity (CDP) card
     Distributes Clock card (CLK) and Reference (REF) to the Switch Unit
     (SWU) and transfers parity and CLK-REF receiver alarms from the Group
     Multiplexer Unit (GMU) to the Switch Control Unit (SCU).

Clock Recovery Board (CRB)
     Extracts clock information from the T1 span line PCM signal by means of
     a phase-lock loop circuit for use in synchronizing the EMX to a
     local/remote Central Office. (See Digital Synchronization Subsystem.)

CM
     Configuration Management..

CMAC
     Control-Channel Mobile Attenuation Code

CMAX
     The maximum number of channels to be scanned by a mobile station when
     accessing a system. See Numeric Information.

CMB
     Combined 100-Series Test.

CMCS
     Configuration Maintenance Control Subsystem.

CMI
     Communications Management Interface

CMPN
     See Campon.

CMRTS
     Cellular Mobile Radio Telephone Service.

CMS
     Call Model Server.

CMSO
     Cellular Mobile Switching Office.

CNLK
     See Cellular Network Link.

CNM
     See Cellular Network Manager.

CNP
     See Cellular Network Processor.

CNR
     Carrier-to-Noise Ratio. The ratio of the mean vector squared over the
     statistical variance of all received vectors. The result is a dB ratio.

CO
     Central Office

CO-1
     Conference.

COC
     Central Office Code

Code Blocking
     A feature in which a system operator can block a given percentage of
     calls in a geographic area in order to reduce system load.

CODEC (Coder/Decoder)
     A speech coding unit that converts speech into a digital format for
     radio broadcast, and vice versa.

Code Pages
     Write-protected RAM on which EMX programs reside.

Coded Digital Color Code (DCC)
     One of four tones in the 6 kHz region that are transmitted by a land
     station on a signaling channel and transponded by a mobile station in a
     cellular system. See also Digital Color Code.

Cold Convergence Calibration
     A procedure performed on the LCI to determine an initial set of LPA
     operating parameters which minimize the intermodulation distortion of
     the LPA.

Cold Load
     The process involved with loading system software after the EMX system
     is first installed or after experiencing a total dc power loss.

Collection buffer
     The memory used by AMA to stage call and control records prior to disk
     write.

Collection Control Table (CCT)
     An external memory table whose elements describe the collection buffer.

Collection File
     The disk file in which call records are recorded by the AMA program.

Co-Located
     At the same location; as in equipment installed in the same room or
     building.

Color Code
     An 8-bit code assigned to a BTS to distinguish interfering signals from
     another cell.

COM-C
     Communication Controller.

COM-P
     Communication Processor.

COM-1 Board
     See Asynchronous Communications Interface-1 board.

Combined 100-Series Test (CMB)
     A sequence of tests that includes one-way noise, echo return loss, and
     incoming level testing. Tests the transmission quality of line trunks.

Combined Channel
     In Nordic systems, a radio channel that is marked as both a calling
     channel and a marked traffic channel. See Calling Channel and Marked
     Traffic Channel.

Combined Paging and Access (CPA)
     See Numeric Information.

Combined Transponder Test (XLT)
     Performs the following measurements: two-way level, two-way c-notch
     noise, and one-way echo return loss. Tests the transmission quality of
     line trunks.

COMM
     (1) The Communication Processor; where the Session Program or the
     Terminal Handler and the Serial Device Driver reside and execute. (2)
     IPR log type for data communication IPRs.

COMM-2 Communication Interface
     Functions as an alarm interface between a Maintenance Processor (ADM-E)
     and Alarm Maintenance Multiplexers.

Command Channel
     See Speaking Channel.

Command File
     An ASCII disk file containing MMI commands and responses for prompts.
     Allows automated operation of a series of commands.

Command Interpreter
     Provides a high level interface between application software and the
     terminal handler.

Command Name
     Indicates the function to be performed by a command, i.e., PUT, FORCE,
     ADD, CHANGE, etc. The command name is followed immediately by a colon
     (:) and parameter blocks.

Command Name Table
     Seven byte ASCII representation of teleprinter commands which have been
     authorized for use in the system.

Commands
     Predefined string of characters which are keyed on EMX teleprinters by
     an operator to change service states, initiate program loading, or
     activate other functions specified within the format of the command.

Common Battery
     The Central Office positive voltage connected to earth and usually
     chassis ground that serves as the return lead for feeding power to
     telephone equipment.

Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (CCIS)
     A separate common channel that carries all line and signaling
     information for a group of interoffice trunks.

Common Channel Signaling
     A signaling method using a link common to a number of channels for the
     transmission of signals necessary for the traffic via these channels.

Common Control Frame (CCF)
     Consists of the power distribution, AMA, CC00, and CC01 frames.

Common Equipment
     Any equipment used by more than one trunk or channel.

Common Equipment Shelf
     See PDC.

Common Memory
     In each processor's memory a section (common memory) shared by all
     memory pages. This section is used to store data and special software
     routines for use by all memory pages (see Memory Page).

Communications Link (CL)
     In Nordic systems, provides a path for communications between the Base
     Control Unit (BCU) and Site Supervisory Unit (SSU).

Communications Package
     The set of programs responsible for transferring messages and data
     between processors via interprocessor links.

Communications Processor
     (1) A slave processor to the Administration Manager which provides all
     on-line terminal I/O handling in the system. (2) The Communications
     Processor in the Administration Subsystem. Used for interfacing with
     the operating and maintenance personnel at the CAMP terminals.

Commutating Switch Module
     Used in the DYNA TAC base station to selectively gate RF signals from
     one of the six sectors to the scanning receiver under control of the
     BSC.

Companding
     The process of compressing quantizing levels at low speech amplitudes
     at the transmitting end of a system and expanding these levels at the
     receiving end, thus reducing quantizing distortion. This term is a
     contraction of compressing and expanding.

Compandor
     A combination of a compressor at one point in a communication path used
     for reducing the amplitude range of signals, followed by an expandor at
     another point used for a complementary increase in the amplitude range.

Compatibility
     The ability of any mobile station to place and receive calls in any
     cellular system. All call placement is automatic.

Compiler
     A language processor written to translate a higher-level language whose
     structure, syntax and symbols are independent of any particular
     machine. The higher-level language instructions most often do not
     correspond directly to binary instructions. It is the compiler's job to
     provide algorithms for this translation.

Composite Cell
     A cell site consisting of two sets of cell equipment, called the
     primary and secondary cells. The secondary cell must be LD or HD II.
     Upgrading an HD cell to a composite cell allows the use of less
     expensive LD or HD II equipment, and allows the use of the extended
     frequency band (E-AMPS or E-T.A.C.S.). Composite cells can support more
     channels than ordinary cells.

Concentrator
     A switching unit located at a distance from a Central Office which
     allows a large number of subscribers to be connected to the Central
     Office over a much smaller number of trunks. The concentration ratio is
     normally 5:1.

CONF
     The Conference/Call Progress Tone Detector Processors in the Call
     Processing Subsystem.

CONFIG
     (1) EMX Configuration and Control Software. The subsystem which loads
     programs into processors from the ADMIN disk in response to IPL, FISO,
     and MMI requests. (2) IPR log type for configuration IPRs.

Conference Circuits
     Used to establish three-way paths through the matrix. They are used for
     conference calls and to make temporary "bridges" to effect smooth
     handoffs. There can be up to 14 conference circuits configured on an
     EMX 2500.

Configuration (Control), Administration and Maintenance Position (CAMP)
     The CAMP Position is a VT100-compatible terminal capable of screen and
     scrolling operations. I consists of a CRT and Keyboard or hardcopy
     entry and display device(s) for entering control commands (MMI
     commands) and receiving status reports.

Congestion
     Situation occurring when an element cannot receive all the service it
     is requesting. Contrast to overload.

Connected
     For the LTMS, a mode that initiates or receives a call and provides
     information on it.

Connection Random Access Memory (CRAM)
     Connection (control) memory of the time slot interchange card used to
     establish and maintain the connections between between the ports of the
     switch.

CONTRO
     IPR log type for control IPRs.

Control Bus Interface (CBI)
     Board Primary function is to uncouple the Switch Matrix Processors
     (SMP) from the subordinate control buses in the various switch matrix
     card cages with regard to redundancy and fault tolerance.

Control Channel
     In DYNA TAC systems, a channel used for the transmission of digital
     control information from a land station to a mobile station or from a
     mobile station to a land station.

Control-Channel Mobile Attenuation Code (CMAC)
     A parameter of the control filler message used to inform the receiving
     mobile of what transmit power level to use when transmitting on the
     reverse control channel (RECC).

Controlled Roll-Out (CRO)
     A CRO consists of a customer site implementation of a new product,
     software release, or combination of products/releases, following the
     successful completion of an FOA of the same system configuration. Only
     those releases or release combinations which have successfully
     completed an FOA together in a system configuration may be released as
     a CRO to customers having the same product(s) or system configuration
     as that of the FOA.

Control Mobile Attenuation Code (CMAC)
     Used to adjust mobile transmitted RF power levels.

Controlling Switch
     In a switch-pair, the switch that determines which Glare Resolution
     should apply to a given Trunk Group upon the Dual Seizure condition.
     The determination of which switch is the controlling switch is
     predetermined by the owners of the switches.

Control Extension and Switch (CES)
     The unit of the EMX 100 that combines the functions of the SCE and SWU
     into a single card cage. See Switch Control Extension and Switch Unit.

Convergence
     A procedure performed on the LCI to determine an optimal set of LPA
     parameters which minimize the intermodulation distortion of the LPA.

COPS
     Call Originations Per Second

COS (Class of Service)
     Defines the extent of the services provided to a given subscriber.

Country Code
     A one- to three-digit number which specifically identifies a country of
     the world that an international call is being routed to (e.g., 1 =
     North America, 44 = United Kingdom). See also Region Code.

Coupler
     See directional coupler or multicoupler.

Coverage Area Requirement
A feature which allows inhibiting the mobile from accessing a cell based on
RF quality as reported from the MS and measured by the BTS.

Coverage Package
     Defines a set of cells within the system. In the EMX 2500, there is a
     maximum of 100 coverage packages.

COW
     Cellular on Wheels.

CP
     Communications Processor

CP TRKLST
     Call Processing Trunk List.

CPA
     Combined Paging and Access

CPE
     Call Processing Manager Extension

CPM
     Call Processing Manager.

CPM-E
     See Call Processing Manager Extension.

CPMX
     See Call Processing Manager Extension.

CPR
     Call Profile Record. A record of a BTS-MS transaction, recorded in the
     transceiver. Made up of data fields which specify details of a call.

CPS
     1. Calls Per Second. 2. Call Processing Server.

cps
     Characters Per Second

CPU
     Central Processing Unit

CR
     See Control Record.

<CR>
     See <Return>.

CRAM
     Control RAM.

CRAM Copy
     Connection Random Access Memory copy; a series of tables used for
     controlling Switch Unit (SWU) signaling and identifying port
     connections. Contains:

   * CRAM Table
     source port IDs.

   * Source Local ID (SLID) Table
     active job numbers.

   * Out Status Table
     outbound active signaling in all ports.

   * In Status Table
     inbound active signaling in all ports.

   * Port Table
     identifies which trunk group member numbers are associated with each
     port.

Crash
     A complete failure of either a hardware device or software operation. A
     crash can halt the entire system's operation or just a particular
     function.

CRB
     Clock Recovery Board

CRC
     Cyclic Redundancy Check.

Credit Card Mobile
     A mobile telephone equipped with a device that reads credit cards. The
     purchasable Special Product: Credit Card Mobiles is required for the
     EMX 2500 to process credit card information.

CRO
     See Controlled Roll-Out.

Crosstalk
     Unwanted sound in a voice channel resulting from cross-coupling to
     another voice channel.

CRT
     Cathode Ray Tube

CRTS
     Cellular Radio Telephone System.

CSC
     Cell Site Controller (LD Base Station)

CSI
     Channel Signaling Interface

CSIC
     Channel Signaling Interface Card

CSM
     Communications Subsystem Manager

CSMA
     Collision Sense Multiple Access. Part of Ethernet specification.

CSR
     See Cellular System Release.

CSRF
     Custom Statistics Reports Facility.

CSS -1. Cellular Subscriber Station
     A generic hardware term used to identify equipment such as mobile
     stations, mobile terminals, portables, and fixed cellular subscriber
     stations which provide the user the capability to access cellular
     network services. 2. Cellular System Subscriber
     The owner of a cellular system subscriber account.

CSU
     Channel Signaling Unit

CSUP
     Channel Signaling Unit Power

CTC
     Counter-Timer Chip

CTIA
     Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association.

CTM
     Custom Text Message. A textual message that goes into the short message
     buffer on a subscriber's mobile unit. This is known as Short Text
     Message (STM) in the MCMC application.

CTR
     Counter

CTS
     Clear-To-Send

CTSP
     Common Trouble Shooting Procedure.

CUG
     Closed User Group.

CUR
     Custom Roaming.

Current States
     The most recent service condition of an EMX component or telephone
     line. Hardware service states are:

----------------------------------------------------------------------------

ACT-DUP  INS-BUSY  LOADING   SBY

ACT-SIMP INS-CMPN  NOT-EQPD  SBY-DUP

ACT-TNS  INS-IDLE  NOT-LOAD  SBY-REST

ACT-TS   INS-REST  OOS       SBY-SIMP

DAC-ACT  INS-RTN   OOS-MNT   SBY-TNS

DAS-ACT  INS-SBY   OOS-QUE   SBY-TS

DAS-SBY  INS-SIMP  OOS-RCVY  SYS-ACT

INS      INS-TEST  OOS-SYS   SYS-SBY

INS-ACT  LOADED    OOS-TEST

----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Custom Roaming
     A Special Product which enables roaming customers to choose which
     remote areas, if any, in which they wish to automatically receive calls
     from the home area. Also see Dynamic Roaming.

Cutover
     The act of disconnecting an existing switching machine and connecting
     in its place another machine.

Cut-Through Codes
     Short codes (such as 411 and 911) which are used as soon as they are
     recognized. Cut-through takes place immediately after the last digit of
     the code.

CW (Call Waiting)
     A cellular calling feature which allows a subscriber to receive another
     call when a call is already in progress.

CWS
     Craft Workstation.

Cycle Time
     The shortest period of time necessary to complete one computer
     instruction.

Cylinder
     All EMX 2500 system tracks at the same radius on all recording surfaces
     of the disk.



+---+
| D |
+---+

D/A
     Digital-to-Analog

DAC
     DAS Communications and Statistics

DAC Active (DAC-ACT)
     Indicates the state in which the DAC tape is in service. (See DAS
     Communications and Statistics Tape.)

DAD
     Differential Alarm Driver

Daisy Chain
     A network configuration defining interconnections between the CBSC and
     several BTSs, where a single 1.544 Mbps HWY connects the CBSC serially
     to each BTS. All communication between the CBSC and the last BTS flows
     through all other BTSs. It allows sharing the 1.544 Mbps HWY among
     cells with fewer traffic channels to reduce cost, but a failure affects
     multiple interconnections. Span line stability limits the number of
     BTSs chained together. Contrast to star and loop configurations.

DAL
     See Dedicated Access Lines.

DAN
     See Digital Announcer.

DAR
     Differential Alarm Receiver

DART
     See Dual Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter.

DAS
     Data Acquisition System

DAS-ACT
     Data Acquisition System Tape Active

DAS-SBY
     Data Acquisition System Tape Standby

DAS Back-Up Tape
     Unit held in Active-Standby to be used when the active DAS tape is
     taken off-line or fails so that no billing data are lost. See Data
     Acquisition System.

DAS Commands
     Teleprinter commands used to activate programs for program loading,
     statistics requests, and controlling magnetic tape units.

DAS Communications and Statistics (DAC) Tape
     A tape drive designated to record only communications and statistics,
     tape management, and time change records. Valid only in systems with
     DAS tape mode 1 or 2. If there is a DAC drive in service, then the DAS
     drive will record only ticketing records.

DAS Tape
     The magnetic tape which is used to record statistics, communication,
     time change, tape management, and ticketing records.

DAT
     Digital Audio Tape. A magnetic tape conforming to an international 4 mm
     tape standard. The MCMC uses DAT tapes for software installs and
     database/voice mail backups.

Data Acquisition System (DAS)
     One of the twin processor subsystems (or nodes) within some EMX models.
     The DAS is responsible for subscriber ticketing and operational system
     statistics. The DAS handles the interface to the magnetic tape drives
     and the Real Time Clock (RTC). See also Node.

Database
     Files and tables from which EMX programs obtain information to perform
     specific functions. The EMX data base is functionally divided into
     Subscriber files and System files which supply all data required for
     Call Processing, System Administration, and Common Control Software.

Database Backup Tape
     Magnetic tape containing copies of all the data files from disk. Made
     on regular intervals, backup tapes allow recovery of the data base in
     the event of a disk failure.

Database Editor (DBE)
     MMI commands which allow the operator to change, delete or display
     information in the system's data base.

Database Processor (DBP)
     The DBP comprises one of the twin processor subsystems (or nodes)
     within an EMX. The DBP maintains information such as mobile subscriber
     files, the system dialing plan, all alarms and interfaces with the
     maintenance teleprinter, and part of the system configuration file.

Database Processor Extension (DBE) Cage
     Extension cage connected to the Database Processor (DBP) node to
     provide expansion slots for peripheral interface cards.

Data Link
     The communications lines, modems, or other hardware used in the
     transmission of information between two or more points.

Data Pages
     Read/write RAM used to store call data subscriber/ system files, tables
     and all other data needed as arguments for program instructions. Some
     portions of this memory can be write protected.

Data Set
     One or more blocks of information recorded on tape.

Data Structure
     A means of representing information used in a system.

Data Word(s)
     The variable fields in the IPR report. The IPR dictionary contains a
     definition for each data word used by an IPR.

DATB
     Direct Access Test Bus.

DATB Database
     Specifies the trunk numbers that are attached to the test bus. (There
     is one test bus per trunk bay, making a possibility of 47 DATBs.)

Day and Time of Day Messages
     Current Gregorian calendar date (MMDDYY), Julian date (DDDYY), and the
     current real time-of-day in seconds in the 24-hour format (00-00-00
     through 23-59-59).

dBm
     A dB referenced to 1 milliwatt; 0 dBm equals one milliwatt.

dBm0
     Noise power in dBm referred to or measured at a zero transmission level
     point (0TLP).

DBCM
     Database and Configuration Management.

DBE
     See Data Base Editor.

DBE
     Data Base Processor Extension

DBMS
     Data Base Management System, runs on the OMC-R platform.

DBP
     Data Base Processor

DCC
     DC Converter module. Located in the MM and OMC-R. It supplies regulated
     DC power.

DCC
     Digital Color Code

DCE
     Data Communication Equipment. The RS-232 configuration designated for
     computers. DCE equipment can be connected to DTE equipment with a
     straight cable, but to other DCE equipment only with a "null modem."

DDD
     Direct Distance Dialing

DDT
     See Delimiter Descriptor Table.

DEALL
     Deactivate All.

Debug
     The process of locating and correcting errors in a computer program.

Decibel (dB)
     A unit stating the logarithmic ratio between two amounts of power.

Decode
     To convert received PCM code words into pulse amplitude modulation
     pulses which are the same as the quantized samples at the transmitting
     end.

Dedicated Access Lines (DAL)
     A group of leased lines that interconnects the OCC switching system to
     a dedicated customer. Dedicated access lines are connected to a
     customer telephone, key telephone system or a PBX.

DEF
     Default.

Default Package (DEFPKG)
     The level of service which is to be accorded to non-standard mobile
     originators. Situations for which a default package would be applied
     include valid foreigns, mobiles with invalid serial numbers, service
     denied, outside their coverage package, and more. Handling for each
     condition can be controlled separately. DEFPKG also refers to the table
     in which this handling is defined.

Delay Dial
     A type of trunk communications signal generated by the receiving
     station. This signal acknowledges seizure of a line but causes the
     transmitting station to delay further signaling (dialing) until the
     receiver generates a "start dial" signal.

Delimiter Descriptor Table (DDT)
     A specific set of parameters which describes the value or value ranges
     of a field in a call record to be displayed.

Delimiter Routine
     A process by which the delimiter specification is validated against a
     call record.

Demand Manual Tests
     Those tests invoked by a man-machine interface command and are software
     driven.

Demodulation
     The process of retrieving an original signal from a modulated carrier
     wave.

Denied Foreign File
     In subscriber recent change (SIM), this file contains mobile IDs of
     subscribers from other mobile telephone systems who are to be denied
     service.

Denied Serial Number File
     In subscriber recent change (SIM), this file contains the serial
     numbers of subscribers who are to be denied service.

DES
     Dynamic Equipment Sharing. Allows RF channels at a cell to be allocated
     to any sector as needed.

Device Identification
     Each hardware device in the EMX 2500 system ID identified by three
     numbers: the DEVICE TYPE, the DEVICE SUBTYPE and the DEVICE ID. The
     TYPE distinguishes between types of hardware such as processors,
     memory, disk, tape, etc. The SUBTYPE distinguishes between groups of
     the same type of device such as ADMIN Manager Memory and CALL Manager
     Memory. The ID distinguishes between individual devices within a group
     such as ADMIN Manager A and ADMIN Manager B.

Device Monitor Task
     Periodically scans the FISO data base entries for all devices and
     conditionally resets selected flags and counts.

Device State Transitions
     Changes in the service condition of any EMX hardware component. Changes
     in states result from teleprinter commands, hardware failures, or line
     signals.

Device Types
     Uniquely identify EMX hardware components. They consist of:

   * Functional unit type.
   * Unit descriptor.
   * Subunit descriptor.
   * Modifier descriptor.

DIA-1 Board
     See Disk Interface Adapter-1 Board.

DGI
     Digital Group Interface

DID
     Direct Inward Dialing

Diagnostic
     Procedure which attempts to localize a fault by setting test conditions
     in a unit and looking for erroneous results.

Diagnostic Programs
     Software designed to ensure that hardware components and error
     detection circuits operate properly. Includes:

   * Call progress checks.
   * Circuit checks.
   * Time release checks.
   * Fault recovery.
   * Tone verification.
   * Remote testing.
   * Voltage monitoring.
   * Transmission path checks.


Dial Pulse Digits
     Digits received or sent out in a dial pulse format.

Dialed Digits
     The series of numbers received via telephone company interface devices
     or base site controllers as a result of dialing on land or mobile
     telephone terminals.

Dialing Timeout
     Timeout indication which releases mobile from channel if no dialing
     information has been received or if a length of time between dialed
     digits is excessive.

Dialog Session ID
     A six-digit identifier assigned to a CLI dialog session. The ID is
     displayed in event messages generated in response to commands entered
     during that session.

Dial Tone
     A signaling protocol that responds to a request for service and
     indicates a "start dial" to the sending switch. The dial tone is
     returned after the receiving switch is prepared to collect the incoming
     digits. See Progress Tones.

DIC
     Direct Inter-LATA Trunks.

DID
     See Direct Inward Dialing.

Differential Alarm Driver (DAD)
     A circuit card in the Switch Unit (SWU) of DYNA TAC systems, provides a
     TTL to differential interface between the Switch Unit (SWU) node and
     the switch control node for the transmission alarm and status signals.
     Differential alarm receiver card connector plugs directly over
     backplane wire wrap pins.

Differential Alarm Receiver (DAR)
     Card in the Switch Control Unit (SCU) of DYNA TAC systems, provides a
     differential to TTL interface between the switch unit node and the
     Switch Control Unit (SCU) node for the reception of alarm and status
     signals. Differential alarm driver card connector plugs directly over
     backplane wire wrap pins.

Differential Interface Receiver (DIR)
     This card receives differential signals from the Dual Port Interface
     Differential (DPID) card and converts them to TTL levels which are
     distributed to the backplane of the extension cage where the DIR
     resides. It also takes the extension cage's I/O bus (data, address and
     control signals) and converts it to differential for transmission to
     the Dual Port Interface Differential (DPID) in the main twin processor
     node.

Differential Line Terminator (DLT-x)
     Provides impedance matching resistors supplying characteristic
     impedance for communication buses. Used to terminate differential line
     type communication buses, clock buses, or buses compatible with 50-pin,
     20-pin, or 10-pin bus cable receptacles. DLT-1 is equipped with 10
     pins, DLT-2 with 20 pins, DLT-3 with 26 pins.

Differential Receiver
     An amplifier that produces an output only in response to a potential
     difference between its input terminals (differential mode signal) and
     in which outputs from common mode interference voltages (i.e., that
     voltage which is the same at both input terminals) on its input
     terminals are suppressed. This receiver converts differential mode
     signals that are compatible with a given logic family.

Digit Translation
     The switching system capability to determine a traffic route based on a
     set or subset of dialed digits.

Differential Signal
     The instantaneous, algebraic difference between two signals. See
     Bipolar.

Digit Analysis File
     Contains all local numbering plan data.

Digit Translation
     The switching system capability to determine a traffic route based on a
     set or subset of dialed digits.

Digital Announcer (DAN)
     Converts analog messages to digital in PCM format at the record
     interface and stores messages in RAM memory.

Digital Color Code (DCC)
     One of four 2-bit expressions transmitted by a land station on a
     signaling channel and transponded by a mobile station in a cellular
     system. This allows the land station to differentiate between a mobile
     responding to its page and a mobile responding to a page from another
     cell. See also Coded Digital Color Code.

Digital Interface Unit (DIU)
     One shelf of a Digital Trunk Frame.

Digital Line/Trunk Interface Module (DIM)
     Interfaces up to 16 T1 lines or digital trunk groups to 12 matrix PCM
     ports without traffic concentration.

Digital Maintenance Frame (DMF)
     One of the two types of trunk maintenance frames (TMFs) in the Trunk
     Maintenance Subsystem (TMS) of the EMX 2500. The DMF houses a
     transmission measurement set and a trunk test set for performing
     automatic trunk testing and manual trunk testing on the digital trunks
     in the T1 Digital Frame Subsystem.

Digital Message
     A message addressed to one or more MCMC subscribers. There are three
     types of digital messages: Voice Mail Notification, Short Message, and
     Digital Page. A Short Message or Digital Page may be addressed to a
     single subscriber or to a Call Group. A Voice Mail Notification is only
     addressed to a single subscriber.

Digital Pad
     A device that introduces loss in an analog signal that is digitally
     encoded.

Digital Signal
     A series of pulses or rapidly changing voltage levels that vary in
     discrete steps or increments.

Digital Switch Matrix Subsystem
     A three-stage, non-blocking digital switch which accommodates up to
     32,768 appearances. Each channel supports data or PCM encoded analog
     information in an 8-bit format at a 64 kbps rate. Each element in the
     matrix is duplicated to provide 2N redundancy for both the control and
     switching elements.

Digital Switching
     A process in which connections are established by operations on digital
     signals without converting them to analog signals.

Digital Synchronization Subsystem
     Provides a method of synchronizing the EMX switching system clock to
     another remote/local source. Makes use of CRB or DGI cards and an ECLK
     card.

Digital Group Interface (DGI)
     Serves the same purpose as the Voice Group Interface card (VGI) but
     also includes a clock recovery circuit to provide digital sync to an
     ECLK board for a T1 span line.

Digital-to-Analog Converter (D/A)
     A device that converts an input number sequence into a function of a
     continuous variable.

Digital Trunk Frame (DTF)
     One frame or electronic rack of digital trunk interface equipment. One
     DTF will interface to 1,536 digital trunk circuits.

Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) Board
     A direct digital controller between two T1 carrier span lines and the
     EMX 2500 matrix.

Digroup
     A basic PCM 24-channel group operating at 1.544 Mbps. Also see T1.

DIM
     See Digital Line/Trunk Interface Module.

DIR
     1) Directive. 2) See Differential Interface Receiver.

Direct Code
     See Service Code.

Direct Distance Dialing (DDD)
     Automatic processing of toll calls by subscriber dialing. May require
     one or more digits to be dialed before the called number.

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
     Automatic direct handling of calls into a PBX or customer-owned
     exchange from a Central Office.

Direct Memory Access (DMA)
     The process of transferring data directly between a processor's memory
     and a peripheral device.

Direct Outward Dialing (DOD)
     Automatic handling of calls from a PBX customer-owned exchange.

Directory Number
     Number which a telephone user dials or keys to make a call. There is a
     direct, but not identical, correspondence between a directory number
     and a mobile ID.

Directed Page
     Used in the Special Product: Custom Roaming. A method of paging in
     which pages are only issued in the mobile's last known EMX and last
     known paging area only. Also see Zone Page.

Directional Coupler
     Located in the SIF. Bi-directional coupler carrying TX and RX RF
     signals to and from the antennas. It includes a switch which allows the
     signals to be routed to the RFDS for testing. Additionally, a port
     allows direct measurement of in-band forward (TX) signals without
     service interruption.

DISC-C (or DISK-C)
     Disk Controller.

DISCS
     Disconnected Subscriber.

Disk Directory List Utility (UDL)
     Provides an off-line means of checking the contents and consistency of
     the EKOS disk directories; lists information read from the directory
     and allocation bitmap areas.

Disk Drive Subsystem
     Consists of a pair of Winchester technology disk drives interfaced to
     the disk controller located in common control.

Disk Examine Utility (UDX)
     This is an off-line, utility for the EKOS disk file management system.
     The UDX is the equivalent of the on-line features of the EDIT FILE,
     RENAME FILE, and DELETE FILE.

Disk File
     A named storage area of disk blocks for information maintained on a
     disk device.

Disk File Utility (UDF)
     Provides the ability to delete or rename any type of disk file as well
     as to load and dump program files. These functions are menu-driven.

Disk Formatting
     The initialization of writing various patterns onto the disk media to
     make it suitable for normal usage.

Disk Interface Adapter-1 (DIA-1)
     Board Provides the interface between two Administrative Manager
     microprocessors and a PRIAM Smart Interface. The DIA-1 performs
     arbitration between the two MPs.

Disk/Tape Copy Utility (UDC)
     A utility program that will allow the operator to copy files to/from a
     disk or magnetic tape.

Disk Test
     Provided in the Administration process only. It performs a DIA
     controller read-after-write memory test, a PRIAM controller self-test
     that includes an up-down sequence test, a disk format, disk write with
     pattern, and an all disk verification test.

Disk Unit Designations
     Up to eight units are served by two different controllers, referred to
     as controllers A and B by the PROM monitor and boot block programs.
     These programs always use the first disk drive on the specified
     controller. The system software numbers the controllers as 0 and 1. The
     disk drives are implemented as pairs numbered from 0 to 3. One drive of
     each pair is attached to each controller, although only drive pair 0 is
     required. The minimum system is two units: each is designated unit 0
     but is attached to controllers 0 and 1.

Display
     A formatted report to be written to the CAMP terminal.

Display Specification
     Tables which determine which events of a call record, or which control
     records are displayed, set up on level 1 "DISPLAY" menu.

Display System Identification
     System identification is a piece of information that is constantly
     being broadcast over the signaling channels. This information is used
     by all mobile units that can "hear" it to determine their status (home,
     roam), and determine how they react to various other pieces of control
     information they see on the signaling channel. The system
     identification is assigned by the FCC and should be unique to every
     system. The only reason this information would need to be displayed
     would be to verify that everyone is in sync within the system (BSCs,
     mobiles, etc.).

Display Topology
     In DYNA TAC system recent change commands, given cell's handoff
     topology may be of interest if handoffs are not functioning properly.
     For example, a cell may be specified in the handoff topology that is
     geographically too far away to be a good handoff candidate. This would
     result in subscribers "ping ponging" between cells. Another reason
     topology may be displayed is when adding or deleting cells that may be
     adjacent to a given cell to ensure they are in or out of the topology
     map.

Distance Handover
     A handover due to a mobile's physical distance from the BTS, when
     mobile timing advance exceeds the inter-sector timing advance handover
     threshold.

Distributed Mobile Exchange (DMXt)
     A distributed mobile exchange (DMX) consists of two or more members of
     the basic EMX family married together to provide a large mobile
     telephone exchange. The other switches can be EMX 2500s or other
     switches in the EMX product line.

Distant Traffic Area
     Area controlled by a different EMX terminal.

Distribution Amplifier Module
     Used in the DYNA TAC base station to distribute the 15 kHz signals from
     the SAT generator modules to (1) the voice and signaling channel
     exciter modules, (2) to the receiver bay distribution amplifier, and
     (3) to the second transmitter bay (if used).

Diversion
     See Call Diversion.

Diversity
     A method of improving received signal strength by making use of two
     independent signals which differ in frequency or propagation path from
     the source. In the DYNA TAC system, signals from the strongest two
     sectors of the receive antenna are used to provide diversity. See
     Maximal-Ratio Combining.

Diversity Reception
     Redundant reception method. The use of two RX antenna input signals to
     minimize effects of fading. Depending upon the cell and channel type,
     diversity reception involves either one or two signal pairs. One pair
     is based on the primary antenna plus the stronger of the adjacent
     antennas. Two pairs are based on the primary plus one of each of the
     adjacent antennas. The signals are sent to the XCVR. Pairs are sent to
     master and slave XCVRs. Diversity reception requires duplicate antennas
     in omni configurations.

DLC
     Dummy Load Card

DLC
     Digital Loop Concentrater

DLT-1
     See Differential Line Terminator.

DLT-2
     See Differential Line Terminator.

DLT-3
     See Differential Line Terminator.

DMA
     Deferred Maintenance Alarm.

DMA
     Direct Memory Access

DMF
     See Digital Maintenance Frame.

DMM
     Digital Multimeter.

DMS
     Digital Message Service system. The service is provided by the EMX
     2500, BSCs, NAMPS subscriber units, and the Motorola Cellular Message
     Center. The system provides message delivery services to the subscriber
     unit.

DMSAN
     DMS Active Notification.

DMSZP
     DMS Zone Paging.

DMXt
     Distributed Mobile Exchange

DMXIO
     DMX Input/Output. Process that takes DMX messages and gates them into
     the MTS where they can be sent to an application process.

DN
     Directory Number (see MIN)

DNIS
     Digital Number Identification Sequence. A set of DTMF tones transmitted
     to a terminating telephony device that are used as an identification
     number for the call. The DNIS identifies the dialing unit and so can be
     used to select the service or equipment that the user may access.

DOD
     Direct Outward Dialing

DOJHLR
     A feature that enables the IS-41 Converter operator to selectively
     apply the DOJ call delivery restrictions based on the visiting
     subscriber's HLR.

Downlink
     The direction from the PSTN to the MS (through the MSC, MM, and BSS),
     taken by control and audio/traffic signals in a cellular system.

Downtime
     The time period during which a device or system is not functioning
     properly.

DP
     Dial Pulse

DP (Digital Page)
     The telephone number entered by a caller and delivered to the
     subscriber unit as a page. This page is displayed in the CLI buffer.
     The Digital Page can be up to 32 digits long.

DPC
     Destination Point Code.

DPI
     Dual Port Interface Card

DPID
     Dual Port Interface Differential

DPP
     Dedicated Port Processes

DPS
     Digital Power Supply.

DRAM
     Dynamic RAM.

Driver Amplifier
     One of the staged main amplifier modules located in the LPA shelf.
     Amplifies the input signals from the RF Modem. Includes a pre-amplifier
     followed by a three-stage driver amplifier.

Drivers
     Software processes responsible for the output function that interacts
     with output devices such as teleprinters and tape units. Duplicate
     driver processes operate in standby units.

Drop
     (SCIP-MSCP communications link; multidrop link.) A logical connection
     between the SCIP card and a peripheral. The peripheral may be a cell
     site, a SCP (DYNA TAC system), or a CGC (Nordic).

Drum Intercept Announcer (DIA)
     See Recorder Announcer.

Drummer
     For the LTMS, a mode that dials a number repeatedly and provides
     information on the calls.

DS
     A designation referring to the digital signal level and bit rate in the
     digital hierarchy (and other defined interface characteristics). For
     example, DS-1 refers to a digital signal at the first level or 1.544
     Mbps.

DSAP
     Disk Space Analysis Program

DSG
     Data Structures Generator.

DSP
     Digital Signal Processor.

DSSI
     Downlink Signal Strength Indicator.

DSU
     Data Service Unit. Provides physical interface conversion for C7 links
     between the transcoder and MM (1.544 Mbps span line to V.35).
     Interconnects the XC and MM in systems not using LAPx A links.
     Interconnects V.35 compatible interface(s) on the MM with 1.544 Mbps
     HWY interface(s) on the XC. The C7 signaling channels between the CBSC
     and the MSC are transported over the interface. The DSU and router
     reside in a common rack.

DTAP
     Direct Transfer Application Part. Call processing protocol for
     A-interface messages exchanged directly between the MSC and the mobile
     unit without interpretation by the BSS. The format is specific to the
     MSC and BSS manufacturers.

DTE
     Data Terminal Equipment. The RS-232 configuration designated for
     terminals. DTE equipment can be connected to DCE with a straight cable,
     but to other DTE equipment only with a "null modem."

DTF
     See Digital Trunk Frame.

DTG
     Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Tone Generator

DTI Board
     See Digital Trunk Interface Board.

DTMF
     Dual Tone Multi-Frequency. The sounds a push button tone telephone
     makes when it dials a number. A set of ''pure" tones used as a method
     of encoding digits over voice lines.

DTMF Tone Generator (DTG or IDTG)
     Board which produces the dual tone multifrequency signaling tones.

DTMF Tone Receiver (DTR or IDTR)
     Board which detects the dual tone multifrequency signaling tones.

DTP
     Dialogic Telco Platform. The product model name assigned by Dialogic
     Inc. to the VRU chassis used in the MCMC products. This is an ISA-based
     personal computer platform.

DTR
     Dial Tone Required.

DTR
     Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Tone Receiver

DTRX-1 Board
     See Dual Tone Receiver-1 Board.

DTX
     Discontinuous Transmission. Allows a mobile transmitter to power down
     when no speech or data is being transmitted.

Dual Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (DART)
     A dual-channel component used on the Z8000 microprocessor boards to
     provide on-board serial communication capabilities.

Dual Port
     Bus switch that gives complete control of a peripheral device to one of
     the two processors in a node.

Dual Port Interface Differential (DPID)
     The DPID card provides the signal interface between single port
     peripheral cards and the dual bus of the twin processor node. It
     converts the TTL I/O bus to differential and drives it over a
     differential link to an extension cage where it is received by the
     Differential Interface Receiver (DIR) which converts the differential
     signal to TTL levels for the twin processor backplane.

Dual Seizure (Glare)
     An attempt by two switches to select the same trunk circuit
     simultaneously to complete a mobile handoff operation.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
     A method of sending numerical address information from a telephone or
     PBX switchboard by sending simultaneously a combination of two tones
     out of a group of eight. This is called Touch-Code by Motorola and
     Touch Tone by AT&T.

Dual Tone Receiver-1 (DTRX-1) Board
     Used to detect DTMF tone pairs (or valid DTMF digits). One DTRX-1 board
     will interface 32 PCM channels.

Dump
     Transfer of data from memory to a peripheral device with possible
     intermediate reformatting of the data.

Duplex State
     This is a state of the twin processor node and control system in which
     there is an Active-Standby pair that in the event of a
     processor-related failure, either processor can assume the processing
     load. In a duplex state, both sides of the EMX are up.

Duplexer
     Located in the SIF. Applies to TDMA signaling only. Allows a single
     antenna to both transmit and receive. Routes TX signals from the LPA to
     the directional coupler. Routes RX signals from the directional coupler
     to the multicoupler. Includes transmit filter to reduce harmonic
     frequencies and receive filter to reduce out-of-band signals.

DYNA TACr
     The Motorola registered trademark used to describe the Motorola
     cellular radiotelephone communications system that provides Dynamic
     Adaptive Total Area Coverage. The DYNA TAC system consists of:

   * EMX Mobile Telephone Exchange.
   * DYNA TAC Cellular Base Stations.
   * DYNA TAC Mobile Radiotelephone.
   * DYNA TAC Portable Radiotelephone.

DYNA TAC signaling format meets FCC OST bulletin #53. The DYNA TAC cellular
system is a fully-automatic, wide area, high capacity mobile and portable
radiotelephone communications system that offers features and services
comparable with those of the public wireline network. The system is fully
compliant with FCC and EIA Guidelines for 800 MHz Cellular systems.

Dynamic-Duplex
     The primary EMX twin processor node and control system mode of
     operation in which the EMX processing system is configured for the
     highest level of fault tolerance. In this state, the twin processor
     nodes maintain duplicate copies of dynamically changing data stores in
     the memory of both the active and standby processors. Not only are call
     processing data stores fully backed up, but customer and system data
     bases are also kept identical on both sides of each processing node.
     Active and standby processors continuously monitor each other's
     performance, and either is capable of assuming complete control of the
     EMX without any break in system continuity or service.

Dynamic Noise
     Similar to noise a listener would hear during the active part of the
     conversation.

Dynamic Roaming
     A Special Product which enables a mobile to automatically inform the
     EMX that it is a roamer in another area outside the subscriber's home
     LATA. An Inter-LATA carrier is used, transparently, to deliver the
     call.

DYNR
     Dynamic Roaming.

+---+
| E |
+---+


E
     In DYNA TAC systems, the stored value of the E field sent on forward
     control channel. E identifies whether a home mobile station must send
     only MIN1 or both MIN1 and MIN2 when accessing the system. See Numeric
     Information.

E
     Erlang. A unit of telephone traffic which is numerically equal to
     percentage occupancy. It is obtained by multiplying the number of calls
     by the length of the average call in fractions of an hour. One erlang
     is equal to 36 CCS. This unit was named for Agner K. Erlang of the
     Copenhagen Telephone Company. In the United States, this unit is also
     known as a "traffic unit" (TU).

E1
     A digital transmission link with a capacity of 2.048 Mbps. E1 can
     normally handle 30 voice conversations plus two signalling channels. E1
     is primarily used outside the United States.

EAEO
     Equal Access End Office

E-AMPS
     Extended Advanced Mobile Phone System

E-T.A.C.S.
     Extended Total Access Communications System.

E and M
     (1) Ear and Mouth Signaling. (2) Receive and Transmit direct current
     signaling switch. (3) Standard telephony electrical interface.

EBCDIC
     Extended Binary-Coded Decimal Interchange Code

Eb/No
     The ratio between the energy of each information bit (Eb) and the noise
     spectral density (No), usually expressed in dB.

ECLK
     External Synchronizing Clock

EC
     Echo Cancellation. Equipment to reduce signal reflections in PSTN audio
     circuit connections. Used either at the MSC or optionally in the XCDR.

Echo Suppressor
     A device that detects speech signals transmitted in either direction on
     a 4-wire circuit, and introduces loss for suppressing echo in the
     direction opposite the detected transmission.

Echo Suppressor Equipped
     This data element specifies if an echo suppressor is equipped for the
     trunk circuit.

ECR
     Executive Control Register

EIA
     Electronic Industries Association

EIC
     International Electrotechnical Commission.

EID
     Electronic ID.

EIR
     Equipment Identity Register.

EIRP
     Effective Isotropic Radiated Power. Measured at the antenna referenced
     to an isotropic (omni-directional) antenna.

EKOS
     Exchange Kernal Operating System developed by DSC which runs in each of
     the Z8000 processors used in the EMX 2500. Its main functions are all
     interprocessor and intraprocessor messages, managing processor
     resources,and scheduling all tasks.

Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM)
     A programmable read only memory which is electrically programmable
     during equipment operation. If power is shut off, the EEPROM retains
     its program storage.

Electronic Mobile Exchange (EMXt)
     The EMX system is a distributed processor controlled audio switch. It
     is essentially an Electronic Switching System (ESS) with ports
     dedicated to the base stations used to interface with the mobile
     telephone network. The EMX comprises the EMX switch and the Mobile
     Communications Interface (MCI).

Electronic Switching Systems (ESS)
     Used to perform a similar exchange switching function as the
     electromechanical devices but made up of electronic components such as
     transistors and integrated circuits.

ELF
     Environmental Logic Facility. A patch panel card located in the MM and
     OMC-R.

ELPAC
     A power supply.

Emergency Numbers
     Telephone numbers assigned to emergency services, usually public
     services like Police, fire, and ambulance. The translation process
     allows calls to emergency numbers when calls to other numbers would be
     blocked, as in the cases of invalid, unregistered, or hot-line mobiles.

Emergency Overload
     See Overload Class Control.

EMI
     Electromagnetic Interference.

EMPI
     Extended Multiple Port Interface

EMX 2500/EMX Cellular Switching System
     The complete Motorola cellular radiotelephone communications system. It
     includes the mobile radio sets, cell sites, remote switch(es), and
     central switch(es).

EMX Data Base
     All subscriber and system information that is required to support the
     processing of calls through the EMX exchange.

EMX Host
     An EMX 250 or 500 equipped for operation with Remote Switching Unit
     (RSU). The host can support a maximum of 16 single-supergroup RSU, 8
     two-supergroup RSU, or a mixture with a maximum of 16 supergroups.

EMXL
     Inter-EMX Communications Link

EMX Operational Software
     The complete set of programs which are loaded into twin processor nodes
     to control the on-line operation of the EMX exchange.

EMX Switch
     The EMX switch is the heart of the EMX system. It contains the
     microprocessor control node, the data base, and the voice group unit
     used to interface telephone trunks and modems for communication with
     the Mobile Communications Interface (MCI) equipment. The MCI equipment
     may be co-located with the switch center or located at remote sites.

EMX System
     The EMX system is a distributed processor controlled audio switch. It
     is essentially an Electronic Switching System (ESS) with ports
     dedicated to the base stations used to interface with the mobile
     telephone network. The EMX system comprises the EMX switch and the
     Mobile Communications Interface.

End-of-Call Signal
     Single pulse telegram transmitted by the mobile in OBL-B systems to the
     IBSC after the handset has been replaced at the end of a call. This
     initiates the clearing signal in the IBSC. The IBSC also sends an
     update to the EMX for ticketing purposes.

End-to-End
     A function or process that connects one end of a circuit to another end
     in order to complete a path from one point in the system to another
     point.

End-to-end Dialing
     Method of placing a call to a roaming mobile by dialing a designated
     access number in the local area to which the mobile has roamed.

End of Tape (EOT)
     Used to designate end of tape. Indicated by a physical marker.

Engineering Loss
     The system design cable loss value used to engineer digital span lines.

Enhanced Paging
     ''Enhanced" refers to the type of acknowledgment of a paging receipt
     from the subscriber unit.

Entry Point
     Addresses which define the starting locations at which tasks can be
     executed during a particular activation.

EP
     Extended Protocol. An optional NAMPS expansion of the signalling
     messages between the land station and the mobile unit. It allows for
     the addition of system features and operational capabilities. In
     particular it allows pages and thus the Digital Message Services.

EPROM
     Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory

EPU
     Extension Processing Unit

EQ
     Equipped.

Equal Access Dialing
     The ability to choose among competing (long-distance) carriers when
     placing a call requiring a carrier.

Equalization
     The process by which attenuation and/or phase shift is rendered
     essentially constant over a band of frequencies, even though the
     transmission medium or the equipment has losses that vary with
     frequency.

Equalizer
     An electrical network in which attenuation (or gain) and/or phase shift
     varies as a function of frequency. Used to provide equalization.

Equipage
     The hardware components and assemblies that make up the equipment
     complement.

Equipage Tables
     Specific hardware components that are equipped or not equipped. Further
     defines equipped devices as cutover or not cutover; not equipped
     devices are further defined as equipable or not equipable.

Equipment Tables
     Define which hardware components are equipped in the specific EMX
     system and which are available for processing calls. Status of all
     components is indicated as being equipped or non-equipped. See also
     Equipage Tables.

Equipped Devices
     EMX hardware components which are physically installed in a system and
     are available for specific call handling operations. "Not equipped"
     devices are those which are not currently installed in the system or
     may be re-energized.

ER
     Exception Report (specific to the ERAD subsystem)

ERAD (Exception Reporting and Alarms Distribution)
     The IS-41 Applications trigger Exception Reports (ERs) and Alarms as
     specific conditions are encountered. An ER is an error or informational
     message which is processed by the TSCP Exception Reporting and Alarms
     Distribution (ERAD) Subsystem along with Operating System ERs.

Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EPROM)
     A device which provides non-volatile storage memory. Information stored
     in EPROM can be erased only by special procedures.

ERL
     Echo Return Loss.

Erlang
     A measure of telephone traffic intensity equivalent to the average
     number of simultaneous calls. Alternatively, it is the total circuit
     usage in an interval of time divided by that interval. Thus, 1 erlang
     equals 3600 call seconds per hour or 36 CCS per hour.

Error Messages
     Formatted messages generated by a failure in the execution of software
     processes or individual tasks within processes. An error report is
     printed on selected teleprinters to inform the operator of the error.

ERP
     Effective Radiated Power.

Error Amplifier
     One of the staged correction amplifier modules located in the LPA
     shelf. Based on signals from the pre-error amplifier, provides gain
     necessary to cancel IM products generated in the LPA. When summed with
     the LPA output, the IM products are cancelled, leaving only the
     carrier.

ESD
     Electrostatic Discharge.

ESF
     Executive Function

ESI
     External Serial Interface

ESN
     Electronic Serial Number. A unique electronic serial number assigned to
     a mobile subscriber's equipment.

ESS
     Electronic Switch System

Ethernet
     LAN communications interface used by the the GLIs, RFDS, LPA, LMF and
     between systems. Uses TCP/IP control and various application layers
     (PDC-A, SCAP, API, or CLI).

Event Report
     A small, asynchronous, system-generated message used to carry
     information related to an event. Notifications consist of a common set
     of parameters shared by all event reports, and if necessary, specific
     information particular to each event type.

Event Management
     A part of the Fault Management system. It provides information about
     system operations.

EX
     In DYNA TAC systems, identifies whether home mobile stations must send
     MIN1 or both MIN1 and MIN2 when accessing the system. EX differs from E
     in that the information is stored in the mobile station's security and
     identification memory. See Numeric Information.

Exception
     The state of an IPR when it has been logged n times during one
     reporting period, such that n is equal to the threshold value defined
     for the IPR. Once an IPR has reached the exception state, any
     additional loggings of it during the reporting period will be ignored.
     All IPRs that have reached the exception state are reset to the enabled
     state at the beginning of the next 30 minute reporting period.

Exception Threshold
     When an IPR is logged, its report count is incremented. When the report
     count is greater than the exception threshold value, further loggings
     of that IPR are discarded.

Exchange
     Provide the focal point for sending and receiving messages between the
     different programs in the EMX 2500 system. Each Exchange contains
     message buffers which are used to send messages from or receive
     messages into the Exchange. The Exchange name provides the routing
     information for sending a message to an Exchange.

Exchange Code
     That portion of a subscriber's telephone number which identifies the
     central office or exchange to which the subscriber belongs.

EXEC
     Executive

EXEC Services
     Operating system services provided by the Executive software package
     including scheduling, memory allocation, and interprocessor
     communication.

EXEC Tables
     Used by the EXEC to schedule jobs to execution. Includes: Time Table,
     Process Table, State Table, and Task Table.

Execution Control Register (ECR)
     The ECR is a one byte register on the processor card used for one byte
     at a time communication with another processor in the same node.
     Several status, control, and handshake bits are provided for used with
     the ECR.

Executive Function (ESF)
     An executive or operating system, is a software facility providing
     system resource management, task scheduling and communication
     functions.

Executive Program (EXEC)
     The process that coordinates and controls all functions and activities
     of any one node. EXEC includes scheduling of application programs,
     communications between application programs, timing, resource
     management, checkpointing, load sharing, and interrupt handling.

EXP
     Expiration

EXPDIV Table
     Used for expanded network division codes specifying the division code
     data parameters. Non-expanded division network codes are specified in
     the DIVCOD table.

Extended Advanced Mobile Phone System (EAMPS)
     Refers to additional voice channels defined as an extension to AMPS
     systems. Analogous to E-T.A.C.S in T.A.C.S. systems.

Extended Multiple Port Interface (EMPI)
     In the Motorola LD series base station, serves as a communications
     multiplexer for the CSC-to-VCC serial data links to allow the
     connection of two of the eight VCCs to a single CSC. Two EMPIs are
     required for redundant sites.

Extended Protocol
     Extended Protocol is an optional NAMPS expansion of the signalling
     messages between the land station and the mobile unit. It allows for
     the addition of system features and operational capabilities. In
     particular it allows pages and thus the Digital Message Services.

Extended Total Access Communications System
(E-T.A.C.S.)
     Motorola mobile/portable radiotelephone system as implemented in Europe
     and compatible systems, using additional voice channels. Analogous to
     EAMPS in AMPS systems.

Extension Cage
     Card cage which contains processor peripheral cards only and is
     electrically connected to a processor cage (i.e., Communications
     Control Processor, Switch Control Unit).

Extent
     Contiguous blocks allocated to a particular file in the EMX 2500
     system.

External Clock Sync
     A synchronization timing signal between two independent switches for
     data transfer synchronization.

External Handover
     A type of handover from a source TCH in one MM to a target TCH in
     another MM, regardless of whether they are under control of the same
     MSC.

External IPR
     These IPRs are used for maintenance purposes and are of a general
     information nature.

External Memory Test
     Provided in each processor that has external memory. The test detects
     any "stuck-at" memory problems, control bus problems, and card address
     problems.

External Miscellaneous Alarms
     These alarms do not directly affect the condition of the EMX 2500
     system.

External Synchronizing Clock and Reference (ECLK)
     Provides the same functions as the CLK with the added ability to
     synchronize system timing to recovered PCM timing or bipolar or
     differential clock source. PCM clock recovery circuit on a DGI or CRB.
     See Digital Synchronization Subsystem.


+---+
| F |
+---+


FACCH
     Fast ACCH. An auxiliary dedicated control channel which temporarily
     steals the TCH to perform high speed transmissions, carrying control
     information after a call is set up.

Fallback Version
     An earlier software version that is reverted to if a modification or
     upgrade results in undesirable side effects.

Failure Rate
     The number of failures which occur during a given period of time.

Fan Alarm-2 (FA) Board
     Monitors the operation of the cooling fans located in each EMX 2500
     frame.

Fast Frequency Shift Keying (FFSK)
     A form of data transmission in which the modulation frequencies are
     harmonically related to the baud rate (usually 1 and 1-1/2 cycles/baud)
     and the transitions occur at zero crossings.

Fault
     Any of several malfunctions which are detected and reported to the
     Fault Isolation Subsystem. These malfunctions may be caused by
     hardware, software, or system type problems.

Fault Isolation Subsystem (FISO)
     The set of programs that provides the mechanisms for reporting and
     processing the fault condition of the EMX 2500 system.

Fault Management (FM)
     The software function responsible for detecting and analyzing EMX
     hardware and software failures, including the process designed to
     reconfigure the system to restore normal operation.

Feature Package
     Customer-defined assortment of calling options, e.g., Speed Dialing, No
     Answer Transfer, Extended Area Coverage.

Feature Package Table
     In subscriber recent change (SIM) the feature package table contains up
     to 100 entries which can have different groupings of special features
     available in the EMX. Feature packages 1-99 can be defined to be any
     combination of the In-Entry 0. For instance, one feature package might
     include Call Forwarding only, and another might include Call Forwarding
     and No Answer Transfer.

Features
     Standard and optional features available to subscribers.

FEC
     Forward Error Correction. Correction of transmission errors by
     transmitting additional information with the original bit stream. If an
     error is detected, the additional information is used to recreate the
     original information. The RF Modem transceiver card provides this
     function.

FEP
     Front End Processor. A GPROC card in the XC which is loaded with BTS
     (not XCDR) software and terminates LAPD links from the BTS.

FFS
     For Further Study.

FFSK
     Fast Frequency Shift Keying

FIFO
     First-In First-Out

File
     Collection of data records treated as a single unit, e.g., data file,
     customer file.

File Manager (FM)
     EMX 2500 system program that does the disk and tape I/O to the disk
     drive, and handling all disk and tape activities.

FILO
     First-in-last-out. See LIFO.

Final Amplifier
     One of the staged main amplifier modules located in the LPA shelf.
     Provides final gain in two stages for the signal from the driver
     amplifier.

Firmware
     Programs or control instructions which are not changeable (by the user)
     and which are held in Read Only Memory (ROM).

FIRSTCHA
     The number of the first control channel used for accessing a system.
     See Numeric Information.

FIRSTCHP
     The number of the first control channel used for paging mobile
     stations. See Numeric Information.

First-In First-Out (FIFO)
     Memory logic device in which the information placed in the memory in a
     given order is retrieved in that order. (See Queue.)

First Mixer Module
     Mixes the output of the 4-way splitter in a DYNA TAC system with the
     first local oscillator signal to derive the first I-F signal.

FIRSTCHA
     In DYNA TAC systems, the number of the first control channel used for
     accessing a system. See Numeric Information.

FIRSTCHP
     In DYNA TAC systems, the number of the first control channel used for
     paging mobile stations. See Numeric Information.

First Office Application (FOA)
     The FOA is the first commercial test of a new product and/or product
     release, utilizing customer-owned production hardware and supported by
     Motorola development and on-site personnel. In accordance with the
     process objectives, FOA sites are chosen, wherever possible, to
     encompass and represent the majority of existing customer system
     configurations applicable to the new CSR. One FOA site may not contain
     all the representative products necessary to test all new releases
     within the CSR. Under these circumstances, additional subsequent FOA's
     may be needed to test any remaining untested products and/or software
     releases. The more limited scope of these subsequent FOA's requires
     Motorola support of only those development groups responsible for the
     yet untested products and/or software release(s).

First Stage Switch
     Functions to switch an inbound channel associated with a particular
     inway timeslot to a TSI which has an available outway timeslot to
     complete the desired connection.

FISO
     See Fault Isolation Subsystem.

FISO Isolation Task
     Determines the root cause of device faults.

Fixed Charge Rate
     A purchasable Special Product which increments an equipped mobile's
     Charge Meter by a fixed amount after a given time interval. Also see
     Variable Charge Rate.

Fixed Network Equipment
     The EMX switch and base sites, i.e., those portions of the cellular
     system that are not mobile.

Flag
     A character or indicator that signals the occurrence of some
     conditions, such as the end of a word.

Flash
     A succession of off-hook/on-hook signals. See also Hookswitch Flash.

Flip-Flop
     A bistable memory device that can store data as either a logic 1 or 0.

Flash Request
     In DYNA TAC systems, a message sent on a voice channel from a mobile
     station to a land station indicating that a user desires to invoke
     special processing.

FM
     Fault Management

FM
     See File Manager.

FM
     Frequency Modulation

FNE
     Fixed Network Equipment

FOA
     See First Office Application.

FOCC
     Forward Control Channel

"Follow-Me" Call
     Calls generated when the mobile subscriber has informed the EMX that he
     is a roamer in another area. Follow-me calls are automatically
     forwarded to the area where the mobile has registered. See Automatic
     Roaming.

FORCE
     See PUT/FORCE/STATUS Commands and PUT/FORCE/STATUS Messages.

Forced Disconnect
     Procedure whereby a call is terminated, usually not at the mobile
     subscriber's request, after a specified time interval.

Foreground
     The automatic execution of higher priority computer programs which are
     designed to preempt the use of the lower priority background
     activities.

Foreign
     A mobile subscriber registered on one cell group who is permanently
     registered in another cell group in which (s)he makes and receives
     calls frequently. Such a subscriber is classified as a "foreign" in the
     call processing data base.

Foreign Parameter Package (FORPKG)
     An assortment of subscriber attributes, including OCOS, TCOS, Feature
     Package, and Coverage Package, which can be assigned to groups of valid
     foreign mobiles.

Formatted Messages
     The standard data element used to activate processes and tasks in the
     EMX system. Message consists of two parts: EXEC routing and control
     data, and user application program data area, e.g., billing data. The
     format of an EXEC routing and control message is as follows:

   * Data Byte Count
   * Message Type
   * Destination Process ID
   * Destination Local ID
   * Sending Process ID
   * Sending Local ID
   * Relay Process ID
   * User Application Program Data

(See Message Buffers.) In many cases, the user area is omitted because the
message type indicates what process of task should be activated. The routing
and control data is used by the EXEC to direct the message to the proper
destination program.

FORPKG
     See Foreign Parameter Package.

Forward Control Channel (FOCC)
     In DYNA TAC systems, a control channel used from a land station to a
     mobile station.

Forward Voice Channel (FVC)
     In DYNA TAC systems, a voice channel used from a land station to a
     mobile station.

Four-Way (4-Way) Splitter
     Splits the signal from the preselector of the DYNA TAC base station
     into three parts; (1) to the commutating switch for the scan receiver,
     (2) to one of 6 mixer modules for the first 8 channels, and (3) to one
     of 6 mixer modules for the second 8 channels (or spare for 8-channel
     receiver), and (4) spare.

Four-Wire Line
     A two-way transmission circuit using two pairs of conductors. One pair
     is used to transmit information in one direction and the other pair is
     used to transmit in the other direction. Refers to the links available
     in full duplex mode without requiring multiplexing.

FP
     Frame Pulse.

Frame
     1) A set of consecutive Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) time slots
     containing samples from all channels of a group, where the position of
     each sample is identified by reference to a frame alignment signal. 2)
     Refers to the array of bits across the width of magnetic tape. 3) A
     frame is an information or signal structure which allows a receiver to
     identify uniquely an information channel. 4) A mechanical rail assembly
     for equipment mounting.

Frame Alignment
     The state in which the frame of the receiving equipment is synchronized
     with respect to that of the received signal to accomplish accurate data
     extraction.

Frame Alignment Signal
     The distinctive signal used to enable frame alignment to be secured.

Frame Alignment Time Slot
     A particular time slot starting at a particular phase in each frame and
     allocated to the transmission of a frame alignment signal.

Frame Length
     Duration of a frame.

Frame Synchronization
     Required to determine the starting bit position of signal each slot.

Free/Busy Channels
     The current state of an RF channel. RF channels are marked by channel
     control software as being free or as being currently involved in a
     call.

Free/Busy Channel Table
     Contains numbers of channels currently in-service and indicates which
     channels are being used and which channels are free.

Free/Busy Mobiles
     The current state of a mobile unit. Channel control software marks
     mobiles as either idle or currently involved in a call.

Free/Busy Mobile and Channels
     Mobile units and channels which are either available for transmission
     (free) or are already being used for a call (busy). The status of
     channels and mobiles are maintained in tables that mark channels and
     mobiles as free or busy.

Free/Busy Mobile Tables
     Contains numbers of mobile units currently in-service and indicates
     which mobiles are being used and which mobiles are free.

FREQ
     Frequency.

Frequency/Channel Borrowing
     A term for the use of RF channels out of their normal place in the
     reuse pattern. Example: If an area is served with four cells, the
     normal maximum for any one cell is 78 channels. However, user
     distribution may dictate a need for 85 channels in one cell and only 40
     in the other three cells. To increase the capacity without all
     subdivision, seven channels can be "borrowed" from the normal
     complement of one of the three cells and installed in the cell
     requiring 85. If cell subdivision is eventually required, the
     "borrowed" channels may be returned to their proper location in the
     pattern.

Frequency Shift Keying (FSK)
     The form of frequency modulation in which the modulating signal shifts
     the output frequency between predetermined values. (Commonly, the
     instantaneous frequency is shifted between two discrete values termed
     the mark and space frequencies.)

Frequency Translation Error
     A phenomenon which occasionally occurs on imperfect carrier systems
     which results in all frequencies transmitted over a voice channel are
     displaced by a few Hertz.

FRU
     Field Replaceable Unit. A board, module, etc. which can be easily
     replaced in the field with a few simple tools.

FSK
     Frequency Shift Keying

FTL
     Engineering Field Trial.

FTP
     File Transfer Protocol.

FTR
     Feature

FTT
     Field/Functional Testing.

Full-Duplex
     Refers to a communication system, or equipment capable of transmission
     simultaneously in two directions.

Fully Redundant
     A configuration in which all active units providing service are backed
     up by additional units in standby, and the standby units are capable of
     providing service if an active unit fails.

FUNCT Table
     Displays the function code number to determine the called number
     assigned to the function code number.

Functional Unit
     A software identifier for a hardware device, sometimes the same as the
     name for the operating software for the hardware device.

Fuse Panel Board
     Protects the related power supply and boards from power surges or
     excessive power consumption, i.e., shorts to many boards from shorts or
     excessive loads. The fuse panel also helps monitor power at each rack
     through the alarm maintenance multiplexer.

FVC
     Forward Voice Channel

FW
     See Call Forwarding.

FX
     Foreign Exchange Line.

FXO
     Foreign Exchange Office.

FXS
     Foreign Exchange Subscriber.



+---+
| G |
+---+


GA
     See General Availability.

GaAs
     Gallium Arsenic.

GCLK Card Generic Clock card
     Part of the XC. Generates all timing reference signals for the XC.

General Availability (GA)
     Indicates that all prior development, test and FOA activity for the
     software product release have been satisfactorily completed in
     accordance with GA release criteria for the product, and that the
     release is orderable by all customers with applicable product or system
     .

GHz
     Giga-Hertz (109). A unit of frequency equal to 1 billion hertz.

GI
     Group Interface

GID
     Group ID.

GIO (Gateway I/O Process)
     The process responsible for changing message formats and routing
     messages to and from an EMX Switch.

Glare
     The condition when both the local and distant end of a trunk are seized
     at the same instant; resulting in deadlock of the trunk. See Dual
     Seizure

Glare Hold and Glare Release
     A method of glare resolution. One end of the trunk is assigned glare
     hold status and the other glare release status. In the event of glare,
     the glare hold end holds the trunk and the glare release end releases
     the trunk and attempts to seize another.

Global Parameters
     System-wide parameters used within the EMX.

Global Title Translation (GTT)
     GTT is a function performed by an SS7 Signaling Transfer Point (STP) in
     an SS7 network which takes as input a set of digits and produces an SS7
     destination point code. GTT is used by SS7 network entities when
     routing information based on digits, is stored in an STP rather than at
     each individual network entity.

GLR
     Gateway Location Register.

GMT
     Group Multiplexer Terminator

GMU
     Group Multiplexer Unit

GMUP
     Group Multiplexer Unit Power

GMX
     Group Multiplexer

GMXR
     Group Multiplexer Card, Redundant

GOS
     Grade Of Service. A defined level of traffic channel blocking.

GPM
     General Purpose Module. A hardware component (board) located in the
     Tandem ST-2000.

GPROC Card
     Generic Processor card. Part of the XC. A transcoder processor card.
     Configuration defined by software loading, whether FEP, FM, Operations
     & Maintenance, or Call Processsing. Interfaces LANs, the MCAP bus,
     serial bus, and TDM bus. Supports up to 32 serial links.

Graceful Transition (REMOVE PROC)
     Using a processor in the off-line mode while the rest of the system
     remains on-line during troubleshooting.

Grade-of-Service
     A measure of what percentage of calls placed through an exchange fail
     to be completed due to congestion of that exchange. For example: If one
     call in 100 fails, this would be a grade-of-service of 1%. Sometimes
     the telephone industry in the U.S. refers to this as P01. Both terms
     are equal.

Greater Calling Area (GCA)
     In OBL-B systems, a home area in which a mobile subscriber is
     registered.

Groom
     A method to combine a large number of lightly loaded span lines into a
     smaller number of fully loaded span lines.

Ground
     Cold or common side of Central Office power supply.

Groundstart
     Seizure signal initiated by connecting the ring of a line to ground.

Ground Terminator Board (GTB)
     Used to provide a ground point for shielding address and data lines for
     SRAM twisted pair wiring on the backplane.

Group
     The set of 24 or 30 PCM channels assembled by time division
     multiplexing.

Group and Output Pulse Digits
     String of signal bits with translated digits and out-trunk numbers.

Group Identification
     A subset of the most significant bits of the subsystem identification
     (SID) that is used to identify a group of cellular systems.

Group Interface (GI)
     A card in the GMU, SGS, SGE, SNU or SNE which interfaces it to a set of
     24 or 30 audio channels. A group interface may be a Voice Group
     Interface (VGI), Tone Group Interface (TGI) or Three-Party Conference
     (TPC) or Digital Group Interface (DGI) card.

Group Multiplexer Card (GMX)
     The GMX card sequentially interrogates the 16 interface cards 24 or 32
     times each during each data frame, and drives the byte-wide inbound
     data buses to the Switch Unit (SWU). Simultaneously, the GMX card
     distributes data outbound from the SWU to the respective interface
     boards.

Group Multiplexer Terminator (GMT)
     A circuit card in the Group Multiplexer Unit (GMU) used to terminate
     the differential data bus.

Group Multiplexer Unit (GMU)
     Converts the bit streams of up to 16 VGIs into 8-bit parallel format in
     the group interfaces and time division multiplex transmits this
     information to the Switch Unit (SWU). It also receives time division
     multiplexed 8-bit parallel words from the SWU, converts to serial
     format in the group interfaces and sends the resulting Pulse Code
     Modulation (PCM) bit streams to the voice group units.

GSD
     Geographical System Display. Application on OMC-R workstation that
     permits viewing of cellular information in a geographical format.

GTB
     Ground Terminator Board

GTT
     See Global Title Translation.

GUARDIAN
     Tandem Computer, Inc. Operating System; also known as the GUARDIAN 90
     Operating System. It is message-based, modular in design, supports
     multiple processors in a single system, and features a Network File
     System.

Guard Time
     Time allocated for avoiding collision of bursts transmitted by TDMA
     mobiles which are transmitting in adjacent timeslots on the same RF
     frequency.

GUI
     Graphical User Interface. Part of the OMC-R user interface. Provides
     graphical screen presentation of objects with point and click or menu
     inputs. Contrast to CLI.

GVPC
     Gateway Virtual Point Code.



+---+
| H |
+---+



HA
     Home Area

Handfrom
     A handover from a designated source to an unidentified target.

Handler
     A program that controls a particular input, output, or storage device.
     This program can also control files or an interrupt facility.

Handoff (HO)
     The process by which a cellular mobile subscriber engaged in a call,
     and traveling throughout a coverage area, is switched from
     channel-to-channel (or cell-to-cell) automatically during the course of
     the conversation. This occurs when the system determines that poor
     quality conversation could result if the call is not handed off to a
     cell or RF channel of better coverage.

Handoff SSI Bias Offset
     The purpose of the Handoff SSI (Signal Strength Indicator) Bias Offset
     feature is to compensate for abnormal handoff border situations with
     certain IS-41 vendors. Some Intersystem Handoff border situations
     cannot be resolved using conventional cellular switching configuration
     adjustments. This feature modifies the signal strength measurement in
     the Handoff Measurement Return Result message to allow call handoffs to
     occur in the vicinity of the serving area border in both directions.

Handover (HO)
     The switching of the mobile end of a cellular call 1) from one cell
     site location to another; 2) from one cell/sector to another at the
     same cell site location; or 3) from one set of frequencies and
     timeslots to another within the same sector/cell.

Handover Attempt
     The action of seizing or allocating a TCH for a handover, following a
     handover request. An attempt occurs when a traffic channel is assigned
     on the target sector and a handover execution is attempted to it.

Handover Candidate
     A channel which meets the requirements to be considered a handoff
     choice.

Handover Completion
     A call which is successfully handed over to a target sector following a
     handover attempt. A handover is completed when a new logical channel in the
     target sector is assigned to the existing call connection.

Handover Failure
     A call which fails to be successfully handed over to a target sector,
     cell or timeslot following a handover attempt.

Handover IROSC
     Handover Incomplete
     Remain On Source Channel. An unsuccessful handover attempt where the
     call remains on the source TCH.

Handover Request
     A request for handover initiated by the source TCH; applies to handfrom
     only.

Handover Start
     A message received by the transcoder telling it to proceed with the
     handover.

Handshake Protocol
     In IMTS systems, messages exchanged between the EMX and BSC to
     establish a communication link for further transmissions. A maximum of
     16 modems can be utilized by the EMX. Messages include Acknowledgment
     (ACK), No Acknowledgment (NACK), Request-to-End (RTS) and Clear-to-Send
     (CTS).

Handto
     A handover to a designated target from an unidentified source.

Hard Copy
     Any system information printed in some permanent form.

Hard Handoff
     The act of handing off a subscriber to the next base site after (s)he
     has crossed to the cell coverage limit when a conference bridge is
     unavailable. This handoff may cause a short interruption in service.

Hard Tape Errors
     Errors encountered by the Magnetic Tape Drive Interface (MTDI) or the
     Tape Clock Board (TCB) when the card either cannot write a block of
     data to tape or cannot read a block of data from tape.

Hardware
     Physical equipment components.

Hardware/Software Alarm Messages
     Formatted messages indicating status changes, fault conditions, or
     reconfiguration of a hardware component. Alarm messages generate
     reports via the Teleprinter Executive (TEX) and/or activate indicators
     on alarm and status panels.

Harmonic Filter
     Used in the DYNA TAC base stations to remove unwanted harmonics of the
     transmitter frequencies to prevent their being radiated by the antenna.

Hash
     A mathematical operation performed on the file name or other key in
     order to determine which physical directory block should contain that
     file's directory entry. With hashing, normally a file's directory entry
     is found on the first access.

HD
     HD Series of Base Station Products

HDLC
     High Level Data Link Control. An international protocol standard for
     data exchange on a single data link, used within CCITT X.25.

HD II
     HD II Series of Base Station Products

Header
     Small block of descriptive information about a table, queue, or storage
     area.

Header Record
     Marks the beginning of a new DAS tape; also generated as the first
     record after midnight.

Hekimian
     Refers to the Hekimian components of the transmission measurement set
     used in Radio Channel Test. These components are model numbers 3901C,
     3916, and 3927-1.

Help Text Files
     Contain the description of how each MMI command is to be used.

Hexadecimal (HEX)
     A way of representing binary data (bits) grouping data into base 16
     representing decimal equivalents of 0 through 15 using characters 0-9
     and A-F.

Highway
     A transmission path capable of carrying multiplexed data.

Highway Interface (HI)
     A board which interfaces to the TDM Highway such as the DGI-24, DGI-30
     boards.

Highway Interface Control (HIC)
     Control lines which gate data to and from the TDM Highway.

HLR (Home Location Register)
     A database of subscriber identification numbers which are assigned to a
     home service area for record-keeping purposes.

HMI
     Human/Machine Interface.

HNPA
     Home Numbering Plan Area Code. Also see NPA.

HPSC
     High Powered Self Contained

HO
     See handover or hand-off.

Holding Signal
     The 1950 Hz tone transmitted by the IBSC in OBL-B systems to the mobile
     after successfully decoding the call confirmation signal. This signal
     initiates ringing in the mobile and keeps the mobile locked to the
     speaking channel. It also initiates ringback tones to the land calling
     party.

Home Area (HA or CGSA-H)
     Geographical area providing two-way radio service for a given locale.
     Name based on rate center consideration. See also Cellular Geographic
     Service Area

Home Channels
     All radio channels, within a given frequency band, available in a
     subscriber's home Mobile Service Area (MSA).

Home Mobile Station
     In DYNA TAC systems, a mobile station which operates in the cellular
     system from which service is subscribed.

Hookswitch Flash
     Repeated flash signal originated by a subscriber, requesting circuit
     release.

Host EMX
     see EMX Host.

HOT
     Handoff Order Timer

Hot Billing
     Same as Marked Subscriber.

HOTL
     Hot Line.

Hot-Line Mobile
     A mobile which always originates calls to the same terminating number
     regardless of what digits are dialed (except emergency numbers).

Hourly Status Records
     Statistics recorded on magnetic tape at one hour intervals:

   * Communications Records
   * Subscriber Records
   * System Records
   * Tape Management Records
   * Time Change Records


HSCP
     Home Signal Control Point

HTM
     Hekimian Test Module.

HTSUM
     Handoff Ticketing Summary record.

HWC
     Hardware Controller.

Hybrid
     A circuit used in telephony to convert 2-wire operation to 4-wire
     operation and vice versa. Every telephone contains a hybrid to separate
     earpiece and mouthpiece audio and couple both into a 2-wire circuit
     that connects the phone to the Central Office.

Hz
     Hertz



+---+
| I |
+---+


I
     ANI information digit.

I/O
     Input/Output
I&Q
     In phase and Quadrature phase. The two signals used to modulate the
     carrier in a QPSK modulated system.

IB
     Interface Board, either BIB or T43IB, for span line.

IBL
     Inter-BSC Link

IBT
     Interconnect Bus Terminator

IC
     Inter-LATA common carrier or integrated circuit.

ICL
     See Inter-Cell Links.

ICLK
     International Clock

ICT
     Incoming Trunk.

ICT-1 Board
     See Interrupt Cut Through-1 Board.

ICTG
     Incoming Trunk Group.

ID
     Identification number

IDDD
     See International Direct Distance Dialing.

IDF
     Intermediate Distribution Frame

Idle
     For the LTMS, a mode that monitors control and broadcast channels and
     displays information on them.

Idle Channel
     In Nordic systems, a radio channel assigned to a base station and not
     in use (i.e., not occupied and not a marked traffic channel). See
     Marked Traffic Channel.

Idle Channel Noise
     A form of message circuit noise a listener would hear during an idle
     period in a conversation.

Idle Group Signal
     In OBL-B systems, the free speaking channels of a sub-area are
     characterized by the idle group signal. All speaking channels of a
     sub-area use different idle group signal numbers to prevent overlapping
     of radio coverage areas. The mobile subscriber can choose a sub-area to
     hold a conversation in by programming his mobile's receiver to scan a
     selected idle group signal number.

IDR
     Implicit Deregistration.

IDTG
     International Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Tone Generator

IDTR
     International Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Tone Receiver

IEEE
     Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.

i-f
     Intermediate Frequency

IF
     ANI Identification Failure.

IGW
     International Gateway Switch.

IM
     Intermodulation.

IMD
     Intermodulation Distortion.

Immediate Billing
     Same as Marked Subscriber.

Immediate Dial
     A signaling protocol that readies the receiving switch to collect the
     incoming digits upon receipt of the incoming request for service. The
     sending switch requests service delay for a fixed time period and then
     begins outpulsing.

Improved Mobile Telephone Service (IMTS)
     A mobile telephone service providing automatic radio channel selection,
     two-way direct customer dialing, automatic accounting and full
     simultaneous duplex operation. Denotes specific technical and
     operational criteria; standard in basic form with all Bell System and
     many independent telephone companies.

IMT
     See Intermachine Trunk.

IMT Testing
     Intermachine trunk testing of the channel from one switching center to
     another over the microwave network or over the media rather than
     testing back into the telco.

IMTS Mobile Telephone
     Vehicular unit capable of placing and receiving direct customer dialed
     calls automatically on IMTS systems. Understood to include home, roam
     and manual modes and full simultaneous duplex operation. May or may not
     include "party," touch dial, or other optional features.

IN
     Intelligent Network.

In Trunk
     An audio input circuit into the EMX switch from the land network
     Central Office used to make a land-to-mobile call.

INA
     See In-Service Active.

INB
     See In-Service Busy.

In-Band Signaling
     A discipline in which audio tones between 300 and 3400 Hz provide
     supervisory and/or address signaling.

Inbound PCM/DATA Bus
     These 8-bit buses provide the transmission paths for the switch data
     from the SMI boards to the first stage switches.

Inbound Voice Sample Parity
     Parity error has been detected somewhere on the inbound side of the PCM
     path into the EMX switch (GI-GMX-SGI).

INC
     (1) Incoming Level Test. (2) International Common Carrier.


INCSIG Table
     Provides the parameters which describe the incoming signaling data
     elements associated with trunk groups.

Information and Problem Reporting (IPR)
     The mechanism of the system that alerts the operator of a change in
     system status. An IPR is a unique log number defined for one of the log
     types. An IPR consists of a text message which can be displayed on any
     or all of the CAMP terminals. The text of the IPR message identifies
     the type of report, the specific report number and pertinent data
     values. Also see Log Type, Print Priority.

INI
     See In-Service Idle.

INIT
     A procedural modifier for a telephony state. Indicates the system is in
     the process of initializing the device.

Initialize Alarms Display
     Alarms region initialization involves sending an ASCII string which
     contains column headings and any other fixed characters in the display,
     and initializes the variable fields to blanks for all CRTs in an alarms
     region.

Initial Program Load (IPL)
     Refers to the process of loading into memory the required programs and
     assuming old memory contents are disregarded. Also see Bootstrap.

Initialization
     1) A manual procedure such as system start-up. 2) Software routines
     that are executed at system startup which puts hardware and software
     into known states so that normal system activities can begin in a
     controlled fashion.

INL
     Internodal Link

Input/Output (I/O) Unit
     Peripheral devices such as teleprinters, tape drives, used for input or
     output to the processor or system.

INS
     See In-Service.

INSAOA
     In-service state or automatic restoral list.

INS-BUSY
     See In-Service Busy.

INS-CMPN
     See In-Service Campon.

In-Service (INS, ISV)
     1) An indicator about the status of hardware that says the hardware is
     operational. This indicator is often used with another indicator (for
     example, active) that further qualifies the state of the hardware. 2)
     Part of a maintenance command instructing the EMX switch to put a
     hardware unit into service. 3) A device is in-service and is usable by
     any call processing or maintenance functions. The device has no
     redundant capabilities in the system.

In-Service Active (INS-ACT, INA)
     Unit is active and being used.

In-Service Busy (INB, INS-BUSY)
     Circuit being used. The device is a single port unit of the switch,
     currently busy with a code and is unable to handle any further traffic
     until the first call releases.

In-Service Campon (INS-CMPN)
     When an INS unit or circuit that is busy has been requested for some
     maintenance purpose. It is marked so that no further new use is
     allowed. After the present use terminates, the unit or circuit becomes
     available for the requester. A timeout can be specified so that the
     campon does not last for an unreasonable amount of time. If the campon
     expires then the request is denied.

In-Service Idle (INS-IDLE)
     Circuit available and not being used. Device is a single port unit of
     the switch (BCU, BSC, RANN, trunk receiver, etc.). The device is not
     busy by a call processing function. It is available for any future call
     processing function.

In-Service Recovery (INS-RCVY)
     Fault detected in this unit or circuit. The recovery program has placed
     it in this state so that no new users will be allowed.

In-Service Standby (INS-SBY)
     A redundant hardware unit is not being used but is available for use if
     needed. The device can be used for rotation into the active position
     for use by call processing or any legal maintenance commands.

In-Service Test (INS-TST)
     Unit or circuit is being tested but has not been reconfigured out of
     the switch network.

INS-IDLE
     See In-Service Idle.

INS-RCVY
     See In-Service Recovery.

INS-SBY
     See In-Service Standby.

INS-TST
     See In-Service Test.

Instruction
     A software statement that specifies an operation and the values or
     locations of its operands or message.

Integrated Circuit (IC)
     A functional circuit whose components and interconnecting "leads" are
     formed on a single chip of semiconductor material.

Integrated Digital Network
     A network in which A/D and D/A conversion takes place only at the
     subscriber's telephone sets.

Inter-Cell Links (ICL)
     Inter-cell links are links that run between the controlling devices of
     mate cells. The controlling device can be either a CSC (for an LD or HD
     II cell) or an MSCP (for an HD cell). "ICL 1" refers to the link that
     connects a CSC 1 or MSCP 1 of the primary cell to the CSC 1 of the
     secondary cell. Similarly, "ICL 2" refers to the link that connects a
     CSC 2 or MSCP 2 of the primary cell to the CSC 2 of the secondary cell.
     Both ICL 1 and ICL 2 are bi-directional links. Also see Composite Cell.

Intercept
     1) The agency (usually an operator) to which calls are routed when made
     to a line recently removed from service, or in some other category,
     requiring explanation. Automated Intercept System (AIS) versions with
     automatic voice response units are growing in use. 2) In DYNA TAC
     systems, the intercept order is used to inform the user of a procedural
     error made in placing the call.

Interface
     A connecting point between two systems or subsystems.

Interference
     The presence of unwanted RF signals at a receiving station that results
     in service degradation to at least one subscriber. Examples are
     co-channel or adjacent channel interference.

Interference Handover
     One of the causes for handover. Indicates a high BER combined with high
     intra-sector or low inter-sector RSSI, either uplink or downlink. The
     handover is recommended by the transceiver when the confidence
     percentage of averages threshold has been exceeded.

INTERL
     Inter-LATA; a type of Outward Route requiring use of an inter-LATA
     carrier.

Intermachine Trunk (IMT)
     Also called Transit Trunk. (1) A transmission facility (circuit)
     connecting one OCC switching system to another OCC switching system.
     IMTs are terrestrial or satellite and are used on shared (contention)
     or a dedicated basis for carrying all types of switched traffic. (2) A
     trunk used to connect two independent switches.

Intermittent Reception
     Group paging technique, allows a mobile to be in standby as much as 94%
     of the time.

International Direct Distance Dialing (IDDD)
     A type of dialing which implies that a subset of the dialed digits
     contains the world number; no Inward Translation is necessary.

Interoffice Trunk
     Telephone trunk between two local Central Offices.

Internal IPR
     IPRs that are for internal EMX 2500 use only.

Internal Miscellaneous Alarms
     These are the alarms that affect system performance. The customer may
     use the EMX 2500 switching system maintenance subsystem to report
     conditions that affect the operation of the switching system even
     though the failure is not actually part of the EMX 2500 equipment.

Inter-Sector Handover
     type of handover involved in moving the mobile to a target sector
     located at the same cell site or a handover to a target sector located
     at a different cell site.

Intersystem Handoff
     The operation by which a call in process on a radio channel under the
     control of a current serving MSC can be transferred to another radio
     channel under the control of a different MSC without interruption to
     the communication in process. Either MSC can be an EMX Switch.

Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF)
     The physical location for the electrical connections between the
     equipment within a Central Office.

Internodal Link (INL)
     A bi-directional communication path between two EMX nodes.

Interoffice Trunk
     Telephone trunk between two local Central Offices.

Interprocessor Communications Package
     Software package which handles the transfer and integrity of all
     messages passed between processors and all messages to or from
     teletypes/CRTs. Divisions include internodal links, twin processor
     links, base links and serial links.

Interprocessor Communication Protocol
     Sequence of events necessary to transfer data from one processor to
     another. This includes all handshaking and validity checking involved.

Interrupt
     Signals from an EMX component, or change in line states, fault
     conditions, or ASCII-encoded input generated by EMX hardware or
     telephone network devices can cause an Interrupt Service Routine (IRS)
     to be initiated.

Interrupt Cut Through-1 (ICT-1) Board
     Allows interrupt enable signals to reach the destination board when the
     daisy chain continuity is broken or past a missing board.

Interrupt Response Task (IRT)
     A software task scheduled for execution by the EXEC in response to a
     processor interrupt. (See Interrupt Service Routine.)

Interrupt Service Routine (ISR)
     A software routine which is immediately executed when a processor
     interrupt is received. An ISR may handle the interrupt itself or cause
     an interrupt response task to be scheduled.

Inter-Switch Handoff Record
     A record that allows construction of a history of the call. It contains
     a switch identification and air time figure for how long the party was
     present on that switch.

Intra-Base Site Links (IBL)
     Links that run between controlling devices at the cell site. There are
     two bi-directional IBLs that run between controlling devices in a cell.
     Within an HD cell there are two IBLs that connect the cell's MSCP 1 to
     its MSCP 2. Similarly, within an LD or HD II cell there are two IBLs
     that connect the cell's CSC 1 to its CSC 2.

Intraoffice Trunk
     Trunk or path connection within the same Central Office.

IOP
     I/O Processor. Located on the XCDR. Exchanges data.

INV (Invoke Message)
     An Invoke Message is sent by either a switch or the IS-41 Converter to
     initiate an Automatic Roaming or Intersystem Handoff activity.

Invalid Mobile-ID
     A mobile-ID which does not exist in the aggregate of subscriber
     information.

Inward Translation
     The process of determining a world number, based on the dialed digits.
     Digits may be added or removed from the dialed digits when necessary.

Inway Test Receiver
     An injection/monitor test receiver is used to test the inways. The test
     receiver is shared by the two first stage switches on each MUX board.
     Inway data is looped back to the test receiver at a point beyond the
     inway drivers. A multiplexer permits any inway to be accessed by the
     receiver under control of the SMP.

Inways
     The 8.192 MHz serial transmission lines which transmit data from first
     stage switches to the TSI.

INY
     See In-Service Standby.

I/O
     See Input/Output Unit.

IOP
     I/O Processor. Located on the XCDR. Exchanges data.

IP
     Internet Protocol. A protocol which defines the unreliable,
     connection-less delivery mechanism of data packets between computer
     systems.

IPL
     Initial Program Load

ipm
     Impulses (Interruptions) Per Minute

IPR
     See Information and Problem Reporting.

IPR Collection
     The process of receiving logged IPRs and entering them in the
     appropriate log files.

IPR Demand Display
     The process of formatting log reports for log records in a log file.

IPR Dictionary Page
     The information on an IPR dictionary page can be divided into three
     categories: a description of the IPR report which is logged by the IPR
     subsystem, the actions to be taken, if any, upon the logging of the
     IPR, and a description of the alarm which is associated with this IPR.

IPR Distribution
     The process of formatting log reports as the IPRs are logged, then
     distributing them to any active terminals.

IPR Log File
     For each log type there is a disk resident file that contains records
     for each log type. This file is managed as a circular file and the
     entries are in chronological order. Each entry (log record) contains
     all the dynamic information associated with the logging of an IPR which
     is needed to build the log report. It consists of: log number; posted
     date; posted time; exception state; sending processor; data arguments;
     and the sender's task ID.

IPR Logging
     The process of detecting that an IPR needs to be reported, and sending
     the information needed to the IPR collection task.

IPR Number
     Every IPR within a log type is assigned a number ranging from 0 to the
     maximum IPR number allowed by that IPR log type.

ips
     Impulses (Interruptions) Per Second

IPTG
     International Progress Tone Generator

IROSC
     See handover IROSC.

IRR
     Interrupt Request Register, part of the MCAP register.

IRT
     Interrupt Response Task

IS-41
     Intermediate Standard 41. Software which Motorola has developed which
     provides translation between Motorola's proprietary DMX protocol and
     the Electronic Industries Association or Telephony Industries
     Association's standard inter-switch coordination messaging system
     commonly referred to as IS-41.

ISB
     Integrated Status Board.

ISCB
     Integrated Status/Control Board.

ISDN
     Integrated Services Digital Network. A digital network using common
     switches and digital transmission paths to establish connections for
     various services such as telephony, data telex, and facsimilie.

ISL
     Inter-Switch Network Controller Link

ISO
     International Organization of Standards. An international body
     responsible for setting computer related standards.

ISR
     Interrupt Status Register. Part of the MCAP register.

ISR
     Interrupt Service Routine

ISRS
     IS-41 Statistics Reports Subsystem.

ITSTR
     International Test Tone Receiver

ISUP
     ISDN User Part.

ISV
     See In-Service.

IWF
     InterWorking Function.



+---+
| J |
+---+


J1
     Span line interface.

J-T.A.C.S
     See Japanese Total Access Communications System.

Jack, Alarm and Maintenance Panel (JAM)
     Monitors alarm and watchdog signals from the SNC for audible and visual
     alarm indications. Provides site alarm inputs to the SNC for relaying
     to the Host EMX (RSU applications) or to the maintenance terminal. The
     JAM also provides connection facilities for test trunks and for an SMP
     terminal.

Japanese Total Access Communications System (J-T.A.C.S.)
     Japanese implementation of the Total Access Communications System. Also
     see DYNA TAC and T.A.C.S.

JC7
     A variant of C7 used in Japan. See SS7.

Jitter
     Short-term variations of the bits of a digital signal from their ideal
     positions in time.

Job Blocks
     See Memory Block.

Job Memory Block
     See Memory Block.

Job Status Tables
     Includes:

   * Busy or idle.
   * Job memory block address.
   * PID of process currently active.
   * Next task to be run.
   * Current status.
   * Related timeout value.
   * Task descriptor block (pointer to next task if job is aborted).


Journal
     See Change Journal.

JT1
     Span line interface between the CBSC and BTS, using LAPD control and
     SCAP application layer. Carries PDC STRAU voice at 1.544 Mbps. Contains
     24 64 Kbps timeslots. Each timeslot provides up to four 16 Kbps VSELP
     encoded channels.



+---+
| K |
+---+


K
     Kilo (1000).

KA
     Keep Alive Board

kbaud
     Same as kbps.

Kbps
     Kilobits per second. A measure of communication link speed; rate is a
     multiplier times thousands of bits per second.

KD
     Keyboard Display

KDP
     Keyboard Display Printer

Key Field
     A field which is used to index records in a database. Records are
     usually selected for display based on the key field(s).

KHz
     Kilo-Hertz, a thousand hertz, or 1000 cycles per second.

Ki
     Individual subscriber authentication key.

Killer Trunk
     A feature that detects trunks that are always idle, busy, or short
     holding times. It is identified by the system as a trunk that goes off
     hook over five times in a 30 second period. When a killer trunk is
     detected, an IPR is generated and routed to the system console
     identifying the trunk number.

Kit
     A logical collection of cards, power supplies, shelves, frames, etc.

KP
     Key Pulse

KP
     Keyboard Printer

KSH
     Kornshell.

KSW Card
     Kiloport Switch card. Part of the XC. Provides primary and subrate
     switching between the MSI cards, XCDR cards, and GPROCs. Performs
     primary switching of bits within the individual 64 Kbps channels
     connected to the CBSC. Performs grooming, separation of control and
     traffic information, and subrate switching of 16 Kbps channels to
     provide efficient packing on the 1.544 Mbps HWY to the BTS.

KSWX Card
     Kiloport Switch Extender card. Part of the XC. Transmits TDM bus
     information and GCLK reference pulses in the XC shelves. Three
     operating modes exist for the card: local (KSWXL), remote (KSWXR) and
     expansion (KSWXE), depending upon the particular slot of the XC shelf.



+---+
| L |
+---+


L-
     Refers to a land-originated call attempt that could not be completed;
     the terminating party is indeterminable.

L-M
     Refers to a land-to-mobile call.

L1, L2, or L3
     See layer 1, 2, or 3.

LAC
     Location Area Code.

LAN
     Local Area Network

LAN
     Local Area Network (CCITT No. 7)

LAN Router
     Interconnects the XC and MM. Interconnects the Ethernet compatible LAN
     interface on the MM with the token ring LAN interface on the XC.
     BTS-to-MM signaling is routed over this interface, as well as control
     messages from the MM to the XC. The DSU and router reside in a common
     rack.

Land Call Messages
     Standard formatted messages into which line signaling has been
     converted by EMX call processing software.

Land Exchange Error
     Indicates that it is impossible to seize a trunk to a land office. In
     some features, such as EMX origination, no response from land, the
     Switch Control Unit (SCU) will retry seizure before informing call
     processing. Some of the failures detected are:

   * EMX originates, land office does not respond;
   * EMX originates, land office responds, but does not return
     clear-to-send;
   * Land office disconnects during EMX digit sending.


Land Origination
     The initiation of a telephone call by a land subscriber.

Land Signaling
     In IMTS systems, standard telephony signaling protocol which is used to
     communicate between the EMX and telephone company Central Office.

Land Station
     In DYNA TAC systems, a station in the Domestic Public Cellular Radio
     telecommunications Service, other than a mobile station, used for radio
     communications with mobile stations.

Land Termination
     A telephone call that is routed to a land subscriber rather than a
     mobile subscriber as a result of dialed digit analysis.

Landline Network
     The landline network is the communications structure that is generally
     associated with the fixed telephone system.

Language
     The set of symbols, rules, and conventions used to convey information,
     either at the human level or the computer level.

LANI
     Local Area Network Interface (CCITT No. 7)

LANX Card LAN Extender card
     Part of the XC. Allows extending the LAN to multiple shelves.

LAPB
     Link Access Protocol Balanced. The OSI level 2 protocol used in DMX
     communications.

LAPD
     Link Access Protocol 'D'. A protocol for data-link access. May be used
     to support Layer 2 signaling links on the A+ interface.

LAPDM
     Link Access Protocol for Digital Mobile channels.

Large Scale Integration (LSI)
     Integrated circuit technology in the size domain of thousands to tens
     of thousands of active devices per circuit. Includes 8-bit
     microcomputer and 4k to 16k memory.

Last Known Area (LKA)
     The cell from which the EMX last communicated with the mobile.

LASTCHA
     In DYNA TAC systems, the number of the last control channel used for
     accessing a system. See Numeric Information.

LASTCHP
     In DYNA TAC systems, the number of the last control channel used for
     paging mobile stations. See Numeric Information.

Last Known Area (LKA)
     The cell or paging area from which the EMX last communicated with the
     mobile. Stored automatically in the subscriber record.

LATA
     Local Access and Transportation Area

Layer
     A segment of the OSI reference model for ISO. Includes seven layers.

Layer 1
     The Physical Layer in the OSI release model. For the radio link,
     responsible for transmitting a bit stream over a physical communication
     channel. Consists of RF channels and TDM/TDMA traffic and control
     channel structures.

Layer 2
     For a radio link, the LAPDM Data Link Layer. Provides data
     transmissions of layer 3 information across the physical link.

Layer 3
     For a BSS, the Network Layer. Supports the transfer of information
     needed to set up calls, clear calls, register and locate mobiles, and
     handoff mobiles during a call. Consists of Radio Transmission
     management, Mobility Manager and Call Control entities.

LBT
     Line Busy Tone (also slow busy).

LCD
     Liquid Crystal Display. The technology used in the display area on some
     of the latest mobile units.

LCKDFT
     Locked By Default.

LCKFEAT
     Locked by Feature.

LCKMOB
     Locked Mobile.

LCI Card
     LPA Controller Interface card. Processor card located in each LPA
     shelf. Controls all functions of the LPA. It provides the
     communications link between the LPA and the RF Modem, monitors alarm
     status, and controls the pilot tone module.

LCR
     See Least-Cost Routing.

LCRINX
     For "Least Cost Routing Index"; a table used in the Outward Translation
     process to implement Least Cost Routing.

LD
     LD Series of Base Station Products

Least-Cost Routing (LCR)
     A feature of the switching equipment that allows completion of a call
     over several different routes. The list of routes is determined by the
     called number and the user identity. The routes are listed in the
     preferred (and least-cost) order. The switching system will attempt to
     place the call over the first (least expensive) route and proceed to
     the other routes if the first is not available. The list of routes is
     changeable by the time of day. By always attempting to place the call
     over the most desirable route, the goal of least-cost routing is
     realized.

Least Significant Bit
     The bit at the extreme right of a binary number which transmits the
     least amount of information.

LED
     Light Emitting Diode

LID
     Local Identification

LIFO
     Last-in-first-out. Also known as a stack. Also, a hardware buffer used
     in interprocessor message transmission.

Line
     A telephone circuit from the Central Office to the subscriber's
     telephone.

Line Busy Tone
     The audible signal returned when the called number is in-service. Also
     called slow busy (60 ipm).

Line Number
     Least significant digits of a telephone number. In North America, the
     last four digits. Also known as a station number.

Line Signaling
     Transitions in E&M signaling.

Line Trunk Manager (LTM)
     Off-loads the call processing communication bus and acts as a
     communications buffer between the Line Trunk Processor and the Call
     Processing Manager. It controls processing status and flow of a call
     through the switch. During a call, it maintains call blocks associated
     with each circuit and collects the CDR record per call. LTMs are
     designated for both land and mobile trunks.

Line Trunk Processor (LTP)
     Consists of a simplex MP processor and is a slave to the Line Trunk
     Manager. The LTP performs the following functions: Allocates and idles
     trunk circuits as directed by the Line Trunk Manager; scans trunks for
     supervision changes; performs incoming and outgoing signaling protocols
     as directed by the Call Processing Manager; performs rotary digit
     collection; performs rotary digit outpulsing; performs digit collection
     based on the numbering plan and the dial number type. (This includes
     the authorization code, dialed number, account code, and miscellaneous
     dialed digits from intermachine trunks.) Collects maintenance dialing
     patterns; performs busy guard timing as required; performs trunk slave
     processing as required; reports trunk circuit errors to the maintenance
     interface reporting routines; collects TMM data for specific trunk
     circuits as directed by the Admin Manager; detects dial tone as
     required; detects a predefined DTMF digit as required; controls
     signaling; monitors supervision; and aids in the testing of up to 128
     analog trunk circuits or 192 digital trunk circuits. A single LTP
     cannot service a combination of analog and digital trunk circuits.

Line/Trunk Subsystem
     Consists of the Line Trunk Processor, Line/Trunk Port Interface boards,
     and Pulse Code Modulation Interface (PCMI) boards. It interfaces the
     EMX 2500 to the evolving telecommunications network.

Link
     A data connection between the EMX and one or more base site controllers
     (BSC). On the EMX side, the link connects to a Base Site Link
     Controller (BSLK). One the BSC side, a Drop tapped off the link
     connects to the CSC (LD, HD II cells) or MSCP (HD cells). Also see
     Drop, Cellular Network Link.

Link
     Carries A+ messages between the MSC and BSS. Signaling links use LAPD
     or LAPB link access procedures.

Linkset
     Comprised of a number of signaling links.

LKA
     See Last Known Area.

LKE
     Last Known EMX.

LMF
     See Local Maintenance Facility.

LO
     Local Oscillator.

Load
     A procedural modifier for a telephony state. Indicates the physical
     device is being downloaded.

Load
     To place data into internal storage; this term generally refers to the
     process of transferring computer instructions and data from a permanent
     storage device, such as tape or disk, to the Central Processing Unit
     (CPU) internal memory, such as Random Access Memory (RAM).

Load Card (LC)
     A card used in EMX system card cages which provide a resistive load for
     a power supply allowing the power supply to be adjusted without circuit
     cards being plugged in the cage.

Loaded
     Status of a Processor Card (PROC). Indicates the PROC has all its code
     loaded, but hasn't finished initialization.

Loading
     Status of a Processor Card (PROC). Indicates the processor is being
     loaded by its mate processor. The Standby Processor Load (SPL) puts the
     PROC in this state.

Load Point
     Starting point of a reel of tape which is indicated by a physical
     marker or metallic tape.

Load Sharing Processor
     A type of redundancy between a redundant processor pair in which the
     throughput load is shared via alternating message receiving.

Load Sharing Power Supply-1 (LSPS-1) Board
     Used to regulate +5.0 volts at the bus while forcing the two power
     supplies connected to the bus to load share within 15.0 amps of each
     other.

Load Splitting Processor
     A type of redundancy between a redundant processor pair in which
     discrete resources are assigned and managed by one or the other
     processor of the pair. In the case of a processor outage, the resources
     are controlled by the processor with the outage are assigned and
     managed by its mate.

Local Access and Transportation Area (LATA)
     In the United States, the area in which calls can be delivered by a
     local telephone company without need for an "equal-access"
     long-distance carrier.

Local Frame Alarm (LFALM)
     An alarm indicating that the VGI is in an out-of-sync condition with
     respect to incoming bipolar bit stream.

Local ID (LID)
     The local ID contains the job number concatenated with a number
     identifying the particular EMX in which the job runs, the identifying
     number being zero for single EMX systems.

Local Maintenance Facility (LMF)
     A portable computer with RS232, Ethernet LAN and Centronix (printer)
     interfaces. Allows on-site access to the BTS, CBSC and OMC-R,
     performing high level functions. Can emulate a terminal, connecting to
     the CBSC, OMC-R or other MMI-type platform.

Local Multiframe Alarm (LMFALM)
     Similar to local frame alarm for multiframe.

Local Subscriber File
     In subscriber recent change (SIM) this file stores information on each
     subscriber in the local EMX. It contains permanent data which describe
     the type of service the user is to receive, and stores information used
     for processing special features, such as call forwarding and no answer
     transfer.

Log Type
     IPRs are classified by log type, then log number within the log type.
     The log types are administration (ADMIN); automatic message accounting
     (AMA); audit (AUDIT); call processing (CALL); data communications
     (COMM); configuration (CONFIG); control (CONTROL); maintenance (MAINT);
     cellular subsystem (MCON); miscellaneous alarms (MISC); switch matrix
     (NETWOR); operating system (OPSYS); cell site (REMOTE); service
     circuits (SVCKTS); and possibly others. Also see Information and
     Problem Reporting.

Logical Route 1
     In the Translation process, a key which identifies a particular world
     number.

Logical Route 2
     In the Translation process, a key which identifies a particular
     physical route or carrier route, based on the Logical Route 1, plus
     TCOS and Source Group.

Loop
     A network configuration defining interconnections between the XC and
     BTS, where a single 1.544 Mbps HWY connects multiple BTSs to the CBSC
     in a closed loop. Offers reduced cost by sharing use of the 1.544 Mbps
     HWY among cells with fewer traffic channels, and being closed, a
     redundant path is created which prevents a single BTS failure from
     affecting others. An interconnection or interface failure still affects
     other interconnections on the chain. Contrast to star and daisy chain
     configurations.

LOOP A/B Test Lines
     Looparound test line which uses two trunk circuits, each accessible via
     a dialed number.

Loop Control
     The closed circuit formed by electronic equipment, such as a base
     station and a cable pair or other wires that connect it to the exchange
     equipment.

Loss-of-Audio
     In IMTS systems, condition in the mobile equipment of other portions of
     the system that result only in a loss of audio. The channel carrier
     might remain on the air, preventing disconnect and making the channel
     unavailable. If desired, the channel seizure and trunk connection may
     be cleared if no audio appears on the circuit within a predetermined
     length of time. Also known as Speech Loss.

LPA
     Linear Power Amplifier. A high-gain, high-power multiple carrier
     amplifier that also serves as a transmitter combiner. The amplifier is
     linear, allowing it to uniformly amplify RF signals across a required
     frequency range in a variety of modulation formats, without the need to
     manually tune fixed (frequency) combiners.

LPA Cabinet
     Linear Power Amplifier cabinet. Part of the BTS. Supports multiple
     carriers. Combines XCVR TX outputs with carriers, amplifies them, and
     routes them to the SIF. Contains up to three LPA shelves.

LPAM
     LPA Module.

LPA Module
     Linear Power Amplifier module. Part of LPA shelf.

LPA Shelf
     Linear Power Amplifier shelf. Located in the LPA cabinet. Uses a
     multitone LPA, which amplifies several carriers simultaneously with low
     distortion and minimal IM products. Typically one LPA shelf required
     per sector. Contains the LCI, pilot tone module, various staged
     amplifiers (pre-error, error, driver and final amplifier modules), and
     alarm interface. Includes redundancy and fault management. Faults are
     reported to the network via the RF Modem GLI card.

LPAF
     Linear Power Amplifier Frame.

LPB
     Lightning Protection Board

LPBACK Testline
     A two-way loopback test line.

LPM
     Line Processor Module. A hardware component (board) located in the
     Tandem ST-2000.

LPSC
     Low Power Self Contained.

LPU Bay
     Local Area Network Peripheral Unit Bay

LR
     Location Register. (also see HLR and VLR).

LSB
     Least Significant Bit

LSI
     Large Scale Integration

LSPS-1
     Board See Load Sharing Power Supply-1 Board.

LTE
     Lightwave Termination Equipment.

LTM
     See Line Trunk Manager.

LTMS
     Laboratory Test-Oriented Mobile Station. A mobile emulation system for
     lab and field testing of the air interface in a PDC system. Comprised
     of a Compaq PC with coprocessor, RIM, antennas and handset.

LTP
     See Line Trunk Processor.

LU
     Logical Unit (see SU)



+---+
| M |
+---+


M
     1) A designation referring to digital multiplex equipment used to
     combine lower bit rate digital signals into higher bit rate signals in
     the digital system hierarchy. For example, M12 denotes a digital
     multiplexer combining DS1 signals into DS2 signals. 2) Mega
     (1,000,000).

M-
     Refers to a mobile-originated call attempt that could not be completed;
     the terminating party is indeterminable.

M-L
     Refers to a mobile-to-land call.

M&A Time Base Subsystem
     Consists of the Maintenance and Administration Processors and their
     associated system interfaces. Functions controlled by this processor
     subsystem include time base subsystem, teletype/CRT device controllers,
     data link interfaces, alarm monitoring module, and the administration
     disk drives.

M20
     Japanese implementation of CCITT No. 7.

Magnetic Tape Controller-1 (MTC-1) Board
     Provides the interface between the Administrative Manager MPs and a
     PERTEC compatible magnetic tape drive with imbedded micro formatter.
     The MTC-1 arbitrates contention for the drives and memory maps all
     commands and status transferred to the MP boards and tape drives.

MAHO
     Mobile Assisted Handover. A MS assists in the handover process by
     measuring downlink RSSI of neighboring perch channels, either at
     intervals or upon demand. It reports the results to the source BTS.

Main Distribution Frame (MDF)
     The physical location in a Central Office for the electrical
     connections to/from other offices and/or outside plant.

MAINT
     Teleprinter operating mode which allows the operator to change the
     service states of EMX hardware and reload the standby processor from
     the active processor.

MAINT
     IPR log type for maintenance IPRs.

Maintenance and Status Unit (MSU)
     The card cage that contains the hardware and operating software used to
     indicate system status and alarms. This equipment interfaces the alarm
     and status panel with the maintenance teleprinter.

Maintenance Command Interpreter Commands (MCI)
     Teleprinter commands used to PUT or FORCE any EMX device into a
     particular service state.

Maintenance Control Center (MCC)
     Contains the CAMP terminal, hard copy printer, manual test position,
     and 101-type test line.

Maintenance Processor (MPROC)
     One of the two microprocessor cards in the Maintenance and Status Unit
     (MSU) which controls the interface between the Data Base Processor
     (DBP) and the Alarm and Status Panels (ASP).

Maintenance Subsystem
     The group of maintenance subsystems in the EMX 2500 which includes IPL,
     CONFIG, Testing, Constant Monitoring, and FISO. It is the common
     interface for a centralized collection point of external alarm
     conditions.

Maintenance Teleprinter
     Teleprinter used by the operator to monitor and change the states of
     EMX hardware devices.

Maintenance Test Frame (MTF)
     Consists of the Transmission Measurement Set (Hekimian 3900 Test
     System), Digital Channel Access Test Set (Sierra), and Trunk Test Set
     (Bery 314A). It tests digital line/trunk interface circuits and
     accommodates manual, remote, and automatic circuit testing.

Maintenance Trunk Data Base
     Maintains the equipped status of a trunk with respect to the
     Maintenance Processor.

Maintenance Trunk Group Testlines Data Base
     Contains the digits that will be outpulsed to reach the specified test
     line trunk group.

Major Outage
     The class of outage that affects service to a moderate number of
     circuits originating or terminating on the EMX 2500 system. This is
     less than 25% of the originating and/or terminating circuits cannot
     complete a call or less than 25% of the originating and/or terminating
     calls are mishandled. Also see Catastrophic Outage, Minor Outage.

Make-Break
     The ratio between the open and closed time of contacts used for dial
     pulsing.

MAMA
     See Mobile Automatic Message Accounting.

Manual Mobile Telephone Service (MTS)
     Outdated mobile telephone service requiring manual channel selection
     and operator call processing with dedicated equipment.

Manual Operation (Processor Reset)
     The PROM monitor begins execution when the processor board is
     electrically reset by either the higher-level master processor or by
     the on-board reset switch or by reapplying power to the board.

Manual Trunk Test Subsystem
     Interfaces with call processing to set up various test connections, and
     manages test equipment resources.

Marked Subscriber
     Used to indicate a subscriber who is expected to remain a subscriber
     only for a short time; billing records are to be generated immediately.
     Requires a purchasable Special Product. Also see Tagged Subscriber.

Marked Traffic Channel
     In Nordic systems, a traffic channel that is available primarily for
     calls from mobile stations.

MAS
     Mobile Activity Status. A service that provides the mobiles current
     activity status (e.g. Registered Busy, Registered Idle, and
     De-registered).

Maskable Interrupt
     An interrupt to a microprocessor which can be masked by software
     processes. Has a lower priority than a non-maskable interrupt.

Master File
     A file which contains all records relating to a particular handoff
     switch-pair. One master file exists for each switch pair. Master files
     are created by the Handoff Configuration server.

Master Site Control Processor (MSCP)
     In the Motorola HD series base station, SCPs that are connected to the
     EMX directly via data links are considered "Master SCPs" (MSCPs). These
     SCPs have control over channel allocation for up to six subordinate
     SCPs. Additionally, this MSCP is in control of the active SIG processor
     to provide the most efficient route for paging traffic bound for that
     processor. In a typical multiple SCP configuration, two MSCPs would be
     connected to the EMX to provide redundancy. Only one of these MSCPs is
     actively assigning channels and controlling paging. It is designated
     the "active master." The other MSCP performs much the same as
     subordinate SCPs that are not directly connected and is called the
     standby master. It is ready to take over the master functions in the
     event of failure of the active master or when a command is initiated.
     In summary, an SCP is considered a "master" if it has a data link
     attached to it. Only two MSCPs are allowed in each HD cell and are the
     first specified with data link connections.

Master SCP
     In multiple configurations, SCPs that are connected to the EMX directly
     via data links are considered "Master SCPs." These SCPs have control
     over channel allocation for up to seven subordinate SCPs. Additionally,
     this SCP is in control of the active SIG processor to provide the most
     efficient route for paging traffic bound for that processor. In a
     typical multiple SCP configuration, two SCPs would be connected to the
     EMX to provide redundancy. Only one of these SCPs is actively assigning
     channels and controlling paging. It is designated the "active master".
     The other SCP connected to the EMX performs much the same as
     subordinate SCPs that are not directly connected and is called the
     standby master. It is ready to take over the master functions in the
     event of failure of the active master or when a command is initiated.
     In summary, an SCP is considered a "master" if it has a data link
     attached to it. Only two master SCPs are allowed in each cell and are
     the first specified with data link connections.

Mate Cell
     In a Composite Cell, term used to refer to the other cell in the
     composite cell pair. Also see Composite Cell.

Matrix Clocks
     The 2.048 MHz clocks in the matrix cables between the SMI and PCMI are
     referred to as inbound matrix clocks and the outbound matrix clocks.
     The outbound matrix clocks are sourced on the SMI. The inbound matrix
     clocks are sourced on the PCMI.

Matrix Control Bus (MCB)
     Provides the control path between the SMP and the CBI.

Matrix Frame Sync
     These signals are associated with the matrix clocks and are distributed
     in the matrix cables. The outbound matrix frame sync signals are
     sourced on the SMI; the inbound matrix frame sync signals are sourced
     on the PCMI.

Matrix Highways
     Inbound matrix highways are 32-channel, serial transmission lines that
     transmit switch data from the PCMI to the SMI; outbound matrix highways
     are corresponding transmission lines that transmit switch data from the
     SMI to the PCMI.

Matrix Inbound Group
     Consists of the SMI, and the set of eight PCMIs connected to the SMI.

Matrix Inbound Subgroup
     The PCMI associated with the matrix inbound group.
Matrix Manager
     MP-6 processor which provides the interface between the matrix
     subsystem and the rest of the common control complex.

Matrix Module
     Used in the DYNA TAC base stations to selectively gate the signals from
     the mixer modules for the two strongest sectors to the voice i-f module
     for each channel under control of the BSC.

Matrix MUX Test
     Provided in the matrix processor using call processing software. The
     test provides a MUX card integrity test, which includes a card present
     test and a control memory read-after-write test.

Matrix Outbound Group
     Consists of the Stage, SMI, and the set of eight PCMIs connected to the
     SMI.

Matrix Outbound Subgroup
     The PCMI associated with the matrix outbound group.

Matrix Subsystem
     A subsystem of the EMX 2500 which handles all path connections between
     trunks and service circuits.

Matrix Timing Buses
     Outbound matrix timing buses consist of an outbound matrix clock and an
     outbound matrix frame sync signal; inbound matrix timing buses consist
     of an inbound matrix clock and an inbound matrix frame sync signal.

Matrix Tone Generator
     A matrix hardware board that generates tones for generation of call
     treatments, etc.

Matrix TSI Test
     Provided in the matrix processor using call processing software. The
     test performs a TSI card integrity test which includes a card present
     test and a control memory read-after-write test.

MAU
     Medium Attachment Unit. Used to attached computer nodes to a network.

MAX
     Maximum

MAXBUSY
     The maximum number of busy occurrences allowed on a reverse control
     channel. See Numeric Information.

MAXSZTR
     The maximum number of seizure attempts allowed on a reverse control
     channel. See Numeric Information.

Mbps
     Megabits per second. A data transfer rate equivalent to 210 (1,024)
     kbps or 220 (1,048,576) bps.

Maximum Busy (MAXBUSY)
     In DYNA TAC systems, the maximum number of busy occurrences allowed on
     a reverse control channel. See Numeric Information.

Maximal-Ratio Combining
     A method of combining two received signals so that the amount
     contributed by each is proportional to its signal strength. See
     Diversity.

MAXSZTR
     In DYNA TAC systems, the maximum number of seizure attempts allowed on
     a reverse control channel. See Numeric Information.

MC
     Message Center. A component of the MCMC which provides connection
     between the VRU/VMB, the DMX network and the User Interface
     (terminals). The MC maintains databases and distributes pages to the
     cellular system.

MC configurations
     see Type I, Type II, Type III.

MCAP Bus
     Motorola Cellular Advanced Processor bus. Used for communications
     between GPROCs and peripheral cards, and for alarms and control
     information within the XC shelf.

MCB
     See Matrix Control Bus.

MCC
     See Maintenance Control Center.

MCCIS
     Motorola Common Channel Interoffice Signaling

MCD
     Multi-Cell Download.

MCG
     Motorola Computer Group. The group within Motorola which provides the
     MC hardware and operating system software.

MCI
     Maintenance Command Interpreter

MCI
     Mobile Communications Interface

MCI Messages
     In Nordic systems, messages that are sent between one mobile
     communications interface unit and another. Some of these messages are
     Nordic Signaling Technique (NST) messages.

MCM
     See Mobile Control Manager.

MCMC
     Motorola Cellular Message Center. The product consists of a Message
     Center and a Voice Response Unit/ internal Voice Mail Bank.

MCMC group
     A call group is a predefined list of up to 30 MCMC subscribers.

MCMC subscriber
     A cellular subscriber with an NAMPS subscriber unit and MCMC services.
     Type I or II MCMC subscriber could have the no-answer transfer, busy
     transfer, or call forwarding switch features. The MCMC subscriber may
     also be reached by direct dial. Accounting records log the subscriber's
     service.

MCMC user
     An individual, such as a caller, who accesses Digital Message Service
     features by leaving a message for a MCMC subscriber via call forwarding
     to the MCMC, direct dialing the MCMC, or user interface via modem.

MCON
     IPR log type for cellular subsystem IPRs.

MCU
     Micro-Computer Unit. Located on the XCDR. Performs configuration and
     housekeeping functions.

MDF
     Main Distribution Frame

MDHW
     Multiple Device Hardware troubleshooting procedure.

MDM
     RF Modem Cabinet.

MDMP
     Modem Power

MDS
     See MIDAS.

Medium Scale Integration (MSI)
     Functional circuitry consisting of 12 or more gates which form a
     complete functional operating unit such as a decoder, counter, or
     multiplexer.

Memory Block(s)
     Also referred to as job memory block. Variable size segment of
     scratchpad memory normally located on the same data page that is
     assigned to a particular task. The memory block (job block) is held for
     the duration of that job's lifetime.

Memory Management
     Subprocess of the EXEC process that includes memory initialization
     allocation of memory to application programs and repooling of memory.

Memory Mapping Unit (MMU)
     A circuit on the Processor Card (PROC) used to extend memory addressing
     capabilities and control access to Random Access Memory (RAM). The
     Memory Mapping Unit (MMP) allows the programmer to access many logical
     memory pages by translating logic addresses into physical memory
     addresses. See Memory Page.

Memory Page
     1) Logical: A 64k unit of memory as referenced by software. The Memory
     Mapping Unit (MMU) on the Processor (PROC) extends the memory by
     dividing the pages and providing access to separate pages for programs
     (code pages) and data (data pages). 2) Physical: The smallest physical
     unit of memory (8k) handled by the MMU. The MMU configures each 64k
     logical page (see above) from eight 8k physical pages.

Menu
     A list of requestable items, in this case, prompts for inputs.

Menu Level
     Groups of menu prompts which perform similar functions.

Message
     1) Data required for one process to communicate with another. Messages
     provide process synchronization while allowing concurrent process
     execution. 2) The standard means by which communication between
     different tasks and processes in the EMX is performed.

Message Area
     In the Japanese telephone network, a geographic area of arbitrary size,
     used to identify a telephone's location. Calls between message areas
     more than 160 kilometers apart are billed at a higher rate than other
     calls.

Message Area Index
     A 2- to 6-digit code identifying a particular Message Area.

Message Area Screening
     For J-T.A.C.S. systems, a method of assuring that calls involving
     mobile terminations are either less than or greater than 160 kilometers
     in distance, consistent with a prefix used to dial the mobile
     telephone. The prefix is necessary because the land switch has no other
     means of knowing the distance involved. The mobile switch must
     guarantee that calls do not succeed unless the prefix and distance
     agree.

Message Analyzer
     An executive task which routes messages to interprocessor link queues
     or application programs. It initiates new jobs, schedules tasks, and
     performs state changes for executing jobs in response to input
     messages. See Message.

Message Buffer
     Variable size segment of common memory allocated by the EXEC process to
     provide memory space for use by application programs. Eight size ranges
     are used which contain the following types of information. (See also
     Formatted Messages.)

   * Message type.
   * Process ID of the destination program.
   * Local ID of the destination program.
   * Process ID of the originating program.
   * Local ID of the originating program.
   * Process ID of destination program if message is sent via relay process.
   * Application program data area.

Message Routing
     The action taken by the EXEC upon receipt of a formatted message.
     Routing data is contained in the first part of each message (see also
     Routing Data).

MF
     1) Multifrequency. 2) RF Modem Frame.

MF Transmitter-1 (MFTX-1) Board
     Produce both CCITT (two-out-of-six) multifrequency and pushbutton (4 by
     4) dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) pulsing frequencies for trunk
     signaling.

MFC
     Multi-Frequency Compelled (Signaling System)

MFC-R2
     Multi-Frequency Compelled, CCITT Recommendation 2

MFC-R2 Backward Receiver
     A board which detects the backward signaling tones of the compelled
     multifrequency R2 signaling discipline.

MFC-R2 Forward Receiver
     A board which detects the forward signaling tones of the compelled
     multifrequency R2 signaling discipline.

MFC-R2 Generator
     A board which produces the tones used in compelled multifrequency R2
     tone signaling.

MFG
     Multifrequency Generator

MFJ
     Modification of Final Judgement.

MFR
     Multifrequency Receiver

MFTX
     Multifrequency Transmitter.

MFTX-1 Board
     See Multifrequency Transmitter or MF Transmitter-1 Board.

MGLI Card
     Master Group Line Interface card.

MHOT
     Mobile Handoff Order Timer

MHz
     Mega-Hertz (106). A unit of frequency equal to 1 million hertz.

MIB
     Management Information Base. Accessed by OMC-R MMI processor over
     X-terminals using remote communication protocol.

Microcomputing Unit (MCU)
     A single integrated circuit containing the features of a MPU, plus all
     of the necessary ingredients (variable storage, timing, and
     programming) to be a self-supporting processing unit. Often times this
     term is used to describe a complete microprocessing system.

Microprocessing Unit (MPU)
     An integrated circuit capable processing data presented to it using its
     instruction set, arithmetic logic unit, and registers; but relies upon
     external devices for variable storage, timing, and programming.

Microprocessor Board (MP-x)
     Complete 16-bit Z8001-based microcomputer on a board that features full
     EMX 2500 system bus compatibility. Board names indicate the amount of
     Random Access Memory and clock speed. The various board names and
     configurations are as seen in Table 1.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Type      RAM       Speed (MHz)

MP-2      256 kB    4

MP-3      512 kB

MP-4      1 MB

MP-6/2    256 kB    6

MP-6/3    512 kB

MP-6/4    1 MB

MP-6/6    2 MB

MP-8/4    1 MB      8

MP-8/6    2 MB

MP-10/4   4 MB      10

MP-10/8   8 MB

----------------------------------------------------------------------------


MID
     1). Mobile Identification. 2). Message Identification.

MIDAS
     A Tandem program to monitor operations and diagnose hardware problems.

MIN
     Mobile Identification Number
     (MIN2 + MIN1)

MIN1
     In DYNA TAC systems, the 24-bit number which corresponds to the 7-digit
     directory telephone number (Exchange Code + Station Number) assigned to
     a mobile station. See Numeric Information and Mobile Identification
     Number.

MIN2
     In DYNA TAC systems, the 10-bit number which corresponds to the 3-digit
     numbering plan area (NPA) designation assigned to a mobile station. See
     Numeric Information and Mobile Identification Number.

MIO Card Matrix I/O card
     Located in the Transceiver or CCP shelves of the RF Modem. Connects RX
     and TX signals between the XCVRs and the appropriate sector LPAs.
     Receives TX signals from the TX Matrix card. Performs 2:1 combining per
     sector of the TX inputs from two sub-shelves and routes the single
     output to the TX Combiner card. Receives RX signals from the
     Preselector I/O card and splits each input two ways. Routes outputs to
     the RX Matrix card.

Minor Outage
     The class out outage that affects service to a small number of circuits
     originating or terminating on the EMX 2500 system. Minor outages
     include: less than 10% of the originating and/or terminating circuits
     cannot complete a call; less than 20% of the originating calls
     encountering switch congestion, and less than 3% of the originating
     and/or terminating calls are mishandled. This includes premature
     disconnects or wrong numbers. Also see Catastrophic Outage, Major
     Outage.

MISC
     IPR log type for miscellaneous IPRs.

Miscellaneous Alarms
     These alarms are used to inform of unique site-dependent conditions
     which require monitoring. These conditions may or may not affect the
     performance of the switching system. Conditions affecting system
     performance will be classified as internal, those which do not as
     external. Miscellaneous alarms are detected by the Alarm Mux. Internal
     miscellaneous alarms include power plant rectifier failures, blown
     fuses and breakers, and T1 carrier channel group alarms.

MLSE
     Maximum Likelihood Sequence Estimator.

MM
     Mobility Manager. Part of the CBSC. Provides the radio management
     function for the SC 9600 RF equipment. Control functions include
     configuration management, fault management, event management,
     performance management, security management, call handling and handover
     processing, and radio channel control (call setup, supervision,
     handover and teardown). The MM coordinates with the OMC-R but operates
     independently from it. Comprised of a processor and I/O cage.

M-M
     Mobile-to-Mobile Call

MMI
     (1) Man/machine interface. Digital command structures and formats. A
     program/command executed from a CAMP terminal to update or display
     database information. (2) The Man/Machine Interface Subsystem of the
     switch which accepts, parses, and dispatches all operator commands.

MMI Processor
     Serves as the user interface for the OMC-R, providing a GUI and CLI.
     Also generates performance reports from information stored in the
     processor.

MMU
     (1) Memory Management Unit. (2) Memory Mapping Unit.

MNL
     Multinode Loader

Mobile
     A vehicular radiotelephone.

Mobile Acknowledge Timeout
     Message caused by failure of a mobile to acknowledge a page.

Mobile Attenuation
     The power of DYNA TAC mobile can be adjusted (or attenuated) to one of
     seven discrete power levels. This is done so that when a mobile comes
     closer to a base receiver its power is reduced to prevent the chance of
     interfering with other mobiles operating on the same voice channel in
     another cell. Additionally, this is of even more importance to portable
     units in that it keeps the transmit power at a minimum to increase the
     usage time before the batteries expire. See Mobile Attenuation Value.

Mobile Attenuation Value
     The mobile attenuation table is used for initially estimating what
     power level to give a mobile when it is first assigned a voice channel
     in a cell. The following describes how this works:

   * A mobile accesses the signaling channel indicating an origination
     attempt. In addition to all of the mobile origination data (MIN1, MIN2,
     dialed digits) the signaling processor also gets a power reading on the
     mobile (the mobile broadcasts on the signaling channel at full power).
   * The BSC takes the received power level and starts comparing it with
     power levels in the mobile attenuation table to try to determine how
     much the mobile power should be reduced when it is given the voice
     channel assignment.
   * If, for example, the received mobile power level were 85, the mobile
     power would not be reduced at all when given a channel assignment since
     its power was less than MA1. If its power level were 0D8, it would be
     assigned the channel, and the power attenuated five steps because 0D8
     is greater than MA5.


Mobile Automatic Message Accounting (MAMA)
     Includes the call processing functions gathered during a call to
     produce a single format ticketing record.

Mobile Call Messages
     Standard formatted messages (i.e., ANI, dialing digits, timeouts,
     paging, etc.) into which mobile signaling has been converted.

Mobile Control Manager (MCM)
     The dominant processor in the processor hierarchy of the Cellular
     Processing System. Controls the overall cellular applications and acts
     as an interface between the cellular subsystem and other EMX 2500
     subsystems. Responsible for issuing pages to the mobile units and for
     conditioning handoffs.

Mobile Communications Interface (MCI)
     The subsystem in Nordic systems that controls the signaling to/from
     base stations and mobile subscribers.

Mobile Coverage Area
     Geographical area within which two-way radio service may reasonably be
     expected between a base station and associated mobile units.

Mobile Disconnection Messages
     Disconnection messages indicate termination of a call due to on-hook
     condition, device failure, or other state that generates a message to
     terminate a call.

Mobile-ID
     1) Mobile subscriber's identification code; same as ANI. 2) EMX
     internal identification of a subscriber. It is a maximum of seven
     digits in length.

Mobile Identification Number (MIN)
     In DYNA TAC systems, the 34-bit number which is a digital
     representation of the 10-digit directory telephone number assigned to a
     mobile station. This number is made up of MIN2 (10-bit) and MIN1
     (24-bit). See also MIN1 and MIN2.

Mobile Origination
     The initiation of a telephone call by a mobile or portable subscriber.

Mobile Origination Messages
     Origination messages generated by an off-hook line signal which cause
     call processing programs to be activated.

Mobile/Land Origination Messages
     Messages generated by an off-hook line signal which will cause
     processing programs to become activated.

Mobile Service Area (MSA)
     Geographical area providing two-way radio service for a given locale.
     Name based on rate center considerations.

Mobile Serving Central Office (MSCO)
     TELCO Central Office associated with the Mobile Service Area.

Mobile Station
     A station in the Domestic Public Cellular Radio Telecommunications
     Service intended to be used while in motion or during halts at
     unspecified points.

Mobile Termination
     A telephone call that is routed to a mobile subscriber as a result of
     dialed digit analysis. See Land Termination.

Mode Combination Descriptor Table
     A multi-linked table used to determine the legality of a teleprinter
     command. Comprised of all legal combinations of passwords, channel
     numbers, command names, and operating modes.

Modem
     A contraction of modulator-demodulator, a piece or unit of equipment
     that connects data terminal equipment to a communication line.

MONTR
     Monitor

MOS
     Manual or maintenance out-of-service devices are under control of the
     operator and are not available to normal system processing.

MOV
     Metal Oxide Varistor.

MP-2
     See Microprocessor Board.

MP-3
     See Microprocessor Board.

MP-4
     See Microprocessor Board.

MP-6
     See Microprocessor Board.

MPB
     Master NMI Process Buffer.

MPI
     Matrix Port Interface.

MPI
     Multiple Port Interface Board

MPL
     Master NVI Process List.

MPROC
     Maintenance Processor Card

MPT
     See Maintenance Processor.

MPU
     Microprocessing Unit

MPWR
     MSU Power

MR
     Message Receiver Process.

MR User
     An originator of CDMS services that result in a page being sent to the
     mobile.

MRA
     Material Return Authorization number. An identification number assigned
     by Motorola Warranty Services which must accompany any board returned
     for repair or replacement.

MRKS
     Marked Subscriber.

MS
     Mobile Station. A subscriber handset, either mobile or portable, or
     other subscriber equipment, such as facsimile machines, etc.

MSA
     Mobile Service Area

MSB
     Most Significant Bit

MSC (Mobile Switching Center)
     A cellular telephone switching system manufactured by a vendor other
     than Motorola.

MSCO
     Mobile Serving Central Office

MSCP
     Master Site Control Processor

MSCSPAN
     MSC Span.

msec
     Millisecond(s)

MSG
     Mobile Signaling Tone Generator Card

MSI
     Mobile Station Identifier. A paging reference number; may indicate the
     location of the MS within the network.
MSI card

     Multiple Span Line Interface card which supports 2.048 Mbps span lines.

MSI-2 card
     See MSIP card.

MSID
     Multiple Serial Interface Device.

MSIP card
     Multiple Span Line Interface Processor card. Part of the XC. Provides
     line termination and network interface for the CBSC interfaces to the
     MSC and BTS, including necessary clock recovery, elastic buffer, jitter
     attenuation, test access and network alarm generation and detection.
     The MSIP card supports two span interfaces, which can be 2.048 Mbps or
     1.544 Mbps.

MSN (Mobile Serial Number)     A unique electronic serial number assigned to a mobile subscriber's
     equipment.

MSU
     Maintenance and Status Unit

MTBF
     Mean-Time-Between-Failure

MT
     Mobile Termination.

MTC
     Magnetic Tape Controller.

MTC-1 Board
     See Magnetic Tape Controller-1 Board.

MTF
     See Maintenance Test Frame.

MTFX
     See Multifrequency Transmitter Board.

MTI
     Multiple Terminal Interface

MTI/TTY Channels
     Circuit path connection for Multiple Terminal Interfaces (MTIs) and
     teleprinters. Teleprinters are connected to the EMX via MTI boards
     located in the Data Base Processor (DBP) node.

MTP
     Message Transfer Part. The lower three levels of the SS7 standard
     architecture; used to transport the BSS Application Part (BSSAP).

MTS
     1. Manual Mobile Telephone Service. 2. Message Transfer System. The
     message delivery system used in TTDs SCP Node software.

MTSO
     Mobile Telephone Switch Office

MTTR
     Mean Time to Repair.

Mu-Law (m-Law)
     An encoding format for the quantization and digitization of analog
     signals into Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) signals and recovery of analog
     signals from PCM signals. The m-Law encoding format specifies
     parameters for compression and re-expansion of the signal during signal
     transmission and processing. This method (m-Law) of PCM encoding is
     used in North American EMX systems (see A-Law).

Multi-block
     One or more blocks treated as a single unit of transfer between an EMX
     2500 system disk unit memory.

Multicoupler
     Located in the SIF. Used to split RX signals for distribution to
     multiple RF Modems. Provides 2:1 pre-amplification, with gain set to
     overcome splitter and cable loss. The multicoupler includes
     pre-amplifier alarms, also routed to the RF Modem.

Multiframe
     A set of consecutive Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) frames in which the
     position of each frame can be identified by reference to a multiframe
     alignment signal.

Multiframe Alignment
     A state in which the proper bits are being extracted from the PCM
     stream in order to allow each frame to be uniquely identified.

Multi-Frequency (MF)
     In the general sense, multifrequency refers to any of the telephone
     address signaling methods using tone pairs to relay numeric
     information. It specifically (in the United States) refers to the
     interoffice address signaling methods using six tones to yield 15 tone
     pairs.

Multi-Frequency Compelled (MFC)
     An interactive tone address signaling method (e.g., R2) in which the
     originating office sends numeric information as compelled or requested,
     digit-by-digit, by the destination office.

Multifrequency/Dual Tone Multifrequency Receiver Processor (RCVR, RCVR-P)
     Selects idle receiver circuits and collects MF or DTMF digits; makes
     and breaks all paths between the receiver and trunk circuits; provides
     interdigital timing for the digit collection sequence; collects digits
     based on the numbering plan and the dialed number type; interfaces the
     receiver circuits to poll and receive digits; collects maintenance
     dialing patterns, performs customer redial functions; reports errors to
     the maintenance interface reporting routines; cleans up and idles
     receiver circuits, and collects TMM data (receiver completions, usage
     time in seconds and out-of-service time in seconds).

Multifrequency/Dual Tone Multifrequency Sender Processor (SNDR, SNDR-P)
     Allocates and idles sender circuits, makes and breaks all paths between
     sender and trunk circuits; outpulses a block of digits to the Central
     Office, provides KP and ST intersection for MF outpulsing; performs
     required interdigital timing; determines the need for software answer
     detection and reports it to the service manager (SVM); reports errors
     to the maintenance interface reporting routines; cleans up and idles
     sender circuits, and collects TMM data (sender attempts, sender
     completions, usage time in seconds, and out-of-service time in
     seconds).

Multi-Frequency Generator (MFG) Card
     A board in the Tone Signaling Unit (TSU) that generates the digital
     representations of the 15 tone pairs used in multifrequency signaling
     systems.

Multi-Frequency Receiver (MFR) Card
     A board in the Tone Signaling Unit (TSU) that decodes the
     multifrequency signaling tone sent to indicate the called number.

Multifrequency Transmitter (MFTX-1) Board
     Provides the EMX 2500 system with the ability to send or transmit tones
     in the 2-out-of-6 MF and dual 1-out-of-4 DTMF formats for trunk
     signaling.

Multiple Port Interface (MPI) Board
     Used to connect three or more DYNA TAC base site controllers at a site.

Multiple Terminal Interface (MTI) Card
     Interfaces with four teleprinters or modems through MIA RS-232C or
     CCITT Rec. V.24 compatible serial ports. The MTI card interfaces with
     the twin processor through a dual port circuit.

Multiplexer Subsystem
     This term refers to the MUX card cage and the boards that reside in the
     card cage. The board in the MUX card cage include: the Switch Matrix
     Interface (SMI), Multiplexer (MUX) and Switch Matrix Tester (SMT).

Multiplexer-2 (MUX-2) Board
     Provides space division multiplexing for PCM formatted data. Used for
     the first and third stages of the EMX 2500 system space-time-space
     Switch Matrix Subsystem.

Multiplexing
     A method to switch traffic channels.

MUX
     Multiplexer.
MXLDL

     MM-XC LAPD Link.



+---+
| N |
+---+


N
     1) In a telephone number or mobile-ID designation, a decimal number
     from 2 to 9. 2) The number of paging channels that a mobile station
     must scan. See Numeric Information.

N+1 Redundancy
     A form of redundancy where a single device serves as a backup or
     standby for a number of others.

NAA
     No Answer/No Page Acknowledge.

NADP
     North American Dial Pulse

NAK
     Negative Acknowledgement.

Nailed Connection
     A semi-permanent voice circuit connection (both directions) through an
     electronic digital switch; set up and maintained in the switch data
     base.

NAM
     See Number Assignment Module.

NAMPS
     Narrowband Advanced Mobile Phone Service. NAMPS provides additional
     cellular voice channels within the North American cellular frequencies
     by decreasing the size of each channel from 30Khz to 10KHz. In addition
     an extended air interface protocol has been defined. This protocol
     allows pages to be transported to NAMPS subscriber units.

NAND Gate
     A logic circuit electrically equivalent to an AND gate followed by a
     NOT gate (inverter). Its output is binary 0 if, and only if, all inputs
     are binary 1.

NAT
     See No-Answer Transfer.

NBUSY
     The number of times a mobile station attempts to seize a reverse
     control channel and finds the reverse control channel busy. See Numeric
     Information.

NC
     Not configured. Devices that are not in the system; therefore, they are
     not available for normal system processing, but may be made available
     if added to the system. This is also a temporary state for devices when
     the IPL program flushes the device tables. Changes are made by either
     automatic or manual configuration control.

NCA
     No Circuit (or Channel) Available.

NCON
     BTS Nailed Connection link.

NE
     (1) Not Equipped. (2) Network Element or Entity. A unit of software and
     hardware that has a network ID (e.g., MM).

NEBS
     Network Equipment-Building System

NEC-A
     Specification for the interface between CBSC and MSC.

NETWOR
     IPR log type for Inter-EMX network IPRs.

NETWK
     Network

Network ID Number
     A unique number which identifies the SS7 Address, X.25 Address, or EMX
     ID Number used for a particular subscriber Mobile Identification Number
     (MIN) or range of subscriber Mobile Identification Numbers (MIN Range).

Network Signaling Unit (NSU)
     An EMX card cage which provides for generation and detection of system
     tone and digit signaling.

NFS
     Network File Service.

NFSD
     Network File Service Daemon.

NIS
     Network Information Service.

NMC
     Network Management Center.

NMI
     Non-Maskable Interrupt

NMT
     Nordic Mobile Telephone System

NN
     National Number.

NNX
     Formerly, the Exchange Code in the North American Dialing Plan. "N"
     digits must be from 2-9; "X" may be any digit from 0-9. NNX is
     generally obsolete and has been changed to NXX.

No-Answer Transfer (NAT)
     An option where the mobile subscriber can ask that all calls be
     forwarded to another number if the mobile has not acknowledged a page
     or if the call is not answered within a pre-determined time.

NOC
     Network Operations Center.

Non-Controlling Switch
     In a switch-pair (MSC/EMX or EMX/MSC), the switch that does not
     determine which Glare Resolution should apply to a given trunk group
     upon dual seizure.

Non-Redundant
     A configuration in which the unit is providing service without a
     backup.

Non-Service-Affecting
    An activity that does not result in the loss or degradation of
    service to any subscriber.

Non-Volatile Memory
     A storage element whose contents are not destroyed if power is lost.

Non-wireline
     A cellular carrier that is not the same company as the local (land)
     telephone company.

NOR Gate
     A logic circuit electrically equivalent to an OR gate followed by a NOT
     gate (inverter). Its output is binary 1, if and only if, all inputs are
     binary 0.

North American Dialing Plan (NADP)
     The 10-digit telephone numbering scheme used throughout North America.
     Also see NPA, NXX, and XXXX.

NOT-EQPD
     Not Equipped

NOT_EQUIP
     Identifies a telephony state. A device is NOT_EQUIP when the operator
     has not configured the system to include this device.

NOT Gate (Inverter)
     A logic circuit whose output is always the opposite of its input.

NOT-LOAD
     See Not Loaded.

NPA
     Numbering Plan Area (Area Code). The first 3 of the 10 digits in the
     North American Dialing Plan.

NPA
     Numbering Plan Area

NRM
     Normal Response Mode

NRZI/PE
     Non-Return to Zero/Phase Encoded. A method of recording digital data on
     magnetic tape.

NSU
     Network Signaling Unit

NSZTR
     Number of Failed Seize Attempts RECC

N-T.A.C.S.
     See Narrow-Band Total Access Communications System.

Number of Busy Seize Attempts (NBUSY)
     In DYNA TAC systems, the number of times a mobile station attempts to
     seize a reverse control channel and finds the reverse control channel
     busy. See Numeric Information.

Number of Failed Seize Attempts (NSZTR)
     In DYNA TAC systems, the number of times a mobile station attempts to
     seize a reverse control channel and fails. See Numeric Information.

Next Registration (NXTREG)
     In DYNA TAC systems, identifies when a mobile station must make its
     next registration to a system. See Numeric Information.

No-Answer Timeout
     A timeout which occurs when a mobile or land subscriber has not
     answered the call within a given period of time.

No-Answer Transfer Calling
     Option where the mobile subscriber can ask that all calls be forwarded
     to another number if the mobile has not acknowledged a page or if the
     call is not answered within a predetermined time.

Node
     An individual processor system (i.e., CCP, DBP, SCU) which contains
     redundant processors, memory, and associated peripherals. A node is a
     functional unit containing a twin processor architecture.

Node States
     The current service state of any node in the system.

Non-Blocking
     The ability or resource to connect a calling subscriber to a
     terminating party (high percentage of completed calls). See Blocking.

Non-Controlling Switch
     In a switch-pair (MSC/EMX or EMX/MSC), the switch that does not
     determine which Glare Resolution should apply to a given trunk group
     upon dual seizure.

Non-Maskable Interrupt (NMI)
     A signal which indicates an interrupt request which must be granted at
     the end of the current instruction cycle.

Nordic
     The Nordic Mobile Telephone System (NMT) was developed jointly by the
     Telecommunication Administration of Denmark, Finland, Norway, and
     Sweden. Nordic is efficient for medium size systems in the 450 MHz
     range and provides for handoffs between adjacent cells.

Nordic Signaling Technique (NST) Messages
     Messages that are defined by Nordic signaling to be used in mobile
     communications.

Not Equipped (NOT-EQPD)
     A service state in which a device is not able to be used for any call
     processing or maintenance functions. Memory has been set aside for this
     device so recent changes can later activate the device.

Not Loaded (NOT-LOAD)
     Status of a PROC. Indicates the PROC is not loaded with any code.

NPA-NXX-XXXX
     In a ten digit telephone number:
     NPA is the Area Code;
     NXX is the Office Code; and
     XXXX are the final four digits.

NSAP
     Network Services Access Point

NSDB (Node Specification Database)
     The NSDB records control the operation of the Motorola IS-41
     applications and the Tandem Telecommunications Systems Inc. (TTSI)
     input/output gateway processes on a Tandem hardware platform.

NTWK
     Network

Null Modem
     A cable connection used to connect two pieces of DCE (or DTE) equipment
     together.

Number Analysis
     Section of the Subscriber Number Analysis Process (SNAP) which handles
     the translation of dialed digits, ANI, and inbound trunk identifiers
     for the purpose of routing a call. Also detects special dialing
     patterns: 0 for operator, 411, 611, 911, area code, cut-through codes,
     etc. See Subscriber Number Analysis Process.

Number Assignment Module (NAM)
     The portion of the mobile/portable phone that is programmed with the
     Mobile ID, overload class, and other related information.

Numeric Information
     Numeric information is used to describe the operation of the mobile
     station.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------

ACCPRIOR    BIS           CMAX

CPA         E             EX

FIRSTCHA    FIRSTCHP      LASTCHA

LASTCHP     MIN1          MIN2

MAXBUSY     MAXSZTR       N

NBUSY       NSZTR         NXTREG

PL          PR            R

RCF         REGID         REGINCR

S           SC            SCC

SIDp        SIDs-p        SIDr

SIDs        WFOM

----------------------------------------------------------------------------


Numbering Plan Area (NPA)
     Synonymous with area code.

Number Plan Tables
     Contains the local numbering plan data associated with a particular EMX
     service area.

Numeric Information
     In DYNA TAC systems, numeric information is used to describe the
     operation of the mobile station:

----------------------------------------------------------------------------

ACCPRIOR    BIS           CMAX

CPA         E             EX

FIRSTCHA    FIRSTCHP      LASTCHA

LASTCHP     MIN1          MIN2

MAXBUSY     MAXSZTR       N

NBUSY       NSZTR         NXTREG

PL          PR            R

RCF         REGID         REGINCR

S           SC            SCC

SIDp        SIDr          SIDs

SIDs-p      VMAC          WFOM

----------------------------------------------------------------------------


NVI
     Non-Vectored Interrupt.

NXTREG
     Next Registration. Identifies when a mobile station must make its next
     registration to a system.

NXX
     Central Office (Exchange) Code (200-999). The 4th through 6th of the 10
     digits in the North American Dialing Plan.



+---+
| N |
+---+


O&M
     Operations and Maintenance.

O&M Network
     Operations & Maintenance Network. Cellular network comprised of a SVC
     connected to management centers for MSC switches (OMC-S) and SC 9600
     radio equipment (OMC-R), plus lower level SC 9600 CBSCs.

O/O
     See omni-omni.

O/S
     See omni-sector.

OBL-B
     Tone type signaling used in some European Systems (e.g., Austria,
     Germany and the Netherlands).

OBS
     Outbound Signaling

OCC
     Other common carrier. In the USA, the common carriers (long-distance
     carriers) other than AT&T. Internationally, carriers other than the
     primary national carrier.

OCOS (Originating Class of Service)
     Identifies the extent of the services provided to a subscriber when
     originating a call.

Octet
     A sequence of eight binary digits (bits) usually presented in a serial
     fashion that are operated upon as a unit without regard to byte
     boundaries. See also Byte.

ODA
     Open Data Access.

OFFCOD
     See Office Code. Also refers to the database table defining office
     codes.

Off-Hook
     Circuit condition caused when the handset is lifted from the switchhook
     of the telephone set.

Off-Line
     Hardware device inactive and not available to the system.

Off-Line Operation
     Refers to when the system is not operational under system software.

Office Code
     The sequence of numbers (three digits used in the United States and
     Canada) which identifies a particular telephone exchange or office.

OGT
     Outgoing Trunk.

OGTG
     Outgoing Trunk Group.

OLTM
     Originating Line Trunk Manager Processor. (See Line Trunk Manager and
     TLTM.)

OMC
     Operations and Maintenance Center. One of two platform control centers
     of the O&M Network. The SC 9600 OMC-R interfaces the SVC with the
     CBSCs. The OMC-S interfaces the SVC with MSCs.

omcpm
     OMC-R Performance Management database; the location of performance
     management records.

OMC-R
     Operations & Maintenance Center
     Radio. Located at the MSC or CBSC; part of the O&M Network. Operates as
     the user interface to the SC 9600 system, supporting the day-to-day
     management of the cellular network. Provides a database for long-term
     network engineering and planning tools. Manages subsystem events and
     alarms, performance, configuration, and security. Interfaces with the
     SVC and SC 9600 CBSCs. Runs on two computer platforms, one for the
     OMC-R hardware and another (MMI processor) for the user interface.

OMCR
     See OMC-R.

OMC-S
     Operations and Maintenance Center
     Switch. Part of the O&M Network. Interfaces the SVC with MSCs.

Omni
     The ability of an antenna to transmit or receive equally in all
     directions as opposed to a directional antenna. See Sector Receive
     Antenna System and Sector-Transmit/Sector Cell.

Omni Cell
     System that uses omni-directional transmit antennas. The cell formed is
     approximately circular.

Omni/Omni
     Omni-directional antenna configuration. Provides a 12-cell reuse
     pattern for voice channels. Requires one omni transmit antenna and two
     omni receive antennas for diversity reception. Duplexers may be used to
     combine transmit and receive functions on the same antenna.

Omni-Receive
     Base receiver system in DYNA TAC systems using two omni-directional
     antennas.

Omni/Sector
     Antenna configuration. Provides a 12-cell reuse pattern for voice
     channels. One omni antenna transmits TCH information. Sector antennas
     transmit CCH and receive TCH and CCH information. Duplexers are used to
     combine the transmit and receive functions on the same antennas.
     Requires a splitter and band pass filter in the SIF. Diversity
     reception is provided by adjacent sector antennas, based upon which one
     has the stronger signal.

Omni-Transmit
     See Omni Cell.

ONAL
     Off-Net Access Line

ONAT
     Off-Net Access Trunk

OnCE Port
     On-Chip Emulation port. Located on the XCDR.

On-Hook
     The normal circuit condition when the handset is on the switchhook of
     the telephone set.

On-Line
     Circuitry or devices in direct connection to, or under direct control
     of, the operating system.

One-Way Trunk
     A trunk which can be seized at only one end.

One Word Paging
     A purchasable Special Product which enables the EMX 2500 to page home
     subscribers with just MIN1 as the mobile ID instead of both MIN1 and
     MIN2. One Word Paging can extend the useful capacity of the Forward
     Control Channel.

OOE
     See Out-of-Service Test.

OOM
     See Out-of-Service Maintenance.

OOS
     (1) Out-of-Service. Identifies a physical state. The OOS state
     indicates the physical device is out of service. This state is reserved
     for physical communication links. (2) Identifies a telephony state. The
     OOS state is used by the BTS device software at the MM to indicate that
     the BTS is completely out of service. This state includes the
     procedural modifier INIT.

OOS_AUTO
     Identifies a telephony state. The OOS_AUTO (automatic) state indicates
     a device is out of service because a failure has occurred when
     attempting to bring the device in service. This state includes the
     procedural modifiers INIT and LOAD.

OOS_DIAG
     Out of Service, Diagnostic.

OOS_FLTD
     Out of Service, Faulted.

OOS-MAINT
     Out-of-Service Maintenance

OOS_MAN
     Identifies a telephony state. The OOS_MAN (manual) state indicates a
     device is out of service for maintenance purposes. This state includes
     the procedural modifiers INIT and LOAD.

OOS-MNT
     See Out-of-Service Maintenance.

OOS_PAR
     Identifies a telephony state. The OOS_PAR (parent) state indicates a
     device is out of service because a higher level device is out of
     service. This state includes the procedural modifiers INIT and LOAD.

OOS_RAM
     Identifies a physical state. The OOS_RAM state indicates a physical
     device is still out of service but is now running downloaded software.

OOS-RCVY
     Out-of-Service Recovery

OOS_ROM
     Identifies a physical state. The OOS_ROM state indicates a physical
     device is out of service and only running code stored in its bootstrap
     ROM.

OOS-SYS
     Out-of-Service System

OOS-TEMP
     Out-of-Service Temporary

OOS-TEST
     Out-of-Service Test

OOT
     See Out-of-Service Temporary.

OOY
     See Out-of-Service System.

Open Batch File
     Only one batch file has the open status, and is the current "written to
     by AMA" file.

Operational Software
     Software that performs on-line functions of the EMX Central Processing
     Unit and its associated peripheral devices. Includes application
     programs, EXEC, and firmware but does not include functions such as
     off-line testing and diagnostic programs.

OPSYS
     IPR log type for operating system (EKOS) IPRs.

Orders
     1) In DYNA TAC systems, the following orders can be sent to a mobile
     station from a land station:

   * Alert
     The alert order is used to inform the user that a call is being
     received.
   * Audit
     The audit order is used by a land station to determine whether the
     mobile station is active in the system.
   * Change Power
     The change power order is used by a land station to change the RF power
     level of a mobile station.
   * Intercept
     The intercept order is used to inform the user of a procedural error
     made in placing the call.
   * Maintenance
     The maintenance order is used by a land station to check the operation
     of a mobile station. All functions are similar to alert but the
     alerting device is not activated.
   * Release
     The release order is used to disconnect a call that is being
     established or is already established.
   * Reorder
     The reorder order is used to inform the user that all facilities are in
     use and the call should be placed again.
   * Send Called-Address
     The send called-address order is used to inform the mobile station that
     it must send a message to the land station with dialed-digit
     information.
   * Stop Alert
     The stop alert order is used to inform a mobile station that it must
     discontinue alerting the user.

2) In IMTS systems, two or four byte signals which are sent between the
Switch Control Interface (SCI) card and the Signal Bit Processor (SBP) card.
They represent instructions to be performed by the device to which they are
sent and provide port information for making connections.


ORIG
     Originating

ORIGO
     Originate Only.

Origination
     The process of getting a MS to channel initially, the result of a
     subscriber-initiated call.

Origination Indicator
     The Origination Indicator defines the type of calls that a mobile in an
     IS-41 System is allowed to originate. These restrictions are conveyed
     to the EMX switch through an OCOS/TCOS pair.

OS
     Operating System. The fundamental program running on a computer which
     controls all operations.

OSI
     Open Systems Interconnection. An ISO reference model for transmission
     of data over a network.

OSN
     Operator Switch.

Outage
     A fault condition resulting in loss of service to an area, or more
     specifically, to an EMX system or component.

Outbound PCM/DATA Bus
     Eight-bit parallel transmission paths which transmit switch data from
     the third stage switches to the SMI.

Outbound Voice Sample Parity
     Parity error has been detected somewhere on the outbound side of the
     PCM path out of the EMX switch (SGI-GMX-GI).

Out-of-Service (OOS)
     (1) A hardware state that says the hardware is not currently
     operational. This indicator is often used with another indicator (for
     example, recovery) that further qualifies the state of the hardware.
     (2) Part of a maintenance command instructing the EMX to put a hardware
     unit out-of-service.

Out-of-Service Maintenance (OOM, OOS-MNT)
     A hardware unit or circuit is placed in this state by a maintenance
     request from the CAMP. It cannot be used for call processing and can
     only be restored via a CAMP command. No automatic restoration of the
     device is allowed. Diagnostics of the device will be allowed.

Out-of-Service Recovery (OOS-RCVY)
     Device is marked to the out-of-service recovery state after all alarms
     are recognized and a reconfiguration is taking place. Diagnostics might
     have been scheduled or the device will just be marked OOS-SYS at the
     end of alarm handling.

Out-of-Service System (OOY, OOS-SYS)
     Device is out-of-service to any call processing functions. Only actions
     to restore service to the device and/or diagnostics of the device will
     be allowed. The device was put out-of-service by the system only.

Out-of-Service Temporary (OOT, OOS-TEMP)
     A hardware unit or circuit that is placed out-of-service when an
     associated unit or circuit on which it depends is placed out of
     service. This unit or circuit can be returned to INS without being
     tested. Device is in a temporary out-of-service state due to a higher
     order device being out-of-service. Restoral of device without the
     higher order unit is not allowed. Taking the device out-of-service
     (i.e., OOS-SYS, OOS-MNT) from this state is allowed. The device will be
     automatically restored in service when the higher unit is restored to
     service.

Out-of-Service Test (OOE, OOS-TEST)

     The unit or circuit has been placed out-of-service for testing, which
     has been exercised by a diagnostic program. No call processing
     functions can take place on this circuit while in this state.

Out-of-Service (OOS)
     1) A hardware state that says the hardware is not currently
     operational. This indicator is often used with another indicator (for
     example, recovery) that further qualifies the state of the hardware. 2)
     Part of a maintenance command instructing the EMX switch to put a
     hardware unit out-of-service.

Out-of-Service Maintenance (OOS-MNT)
     A hardware unit or circuit is placed in this state by a maintenance
     request from the maintenance TTY. It cannot be used for call processing
     and can only be restored via a teleprinter command. No automatic
     restoration of the device is allowed. Diagnostics of the device will be
     allowed.

Out-of-Service Recovery (OOS-RCVY)
     Device is marked to the out of-service recovery state after all alarms
     are recognized and a reconfiguration is taking place. Diagnostics might
     have been scheduled or the device will just be marked OOS-SYS at the
     end of alarm handling.

Out-of-Service System (OOS-SYS)
     Device is out-of-service to any call processing functions. Only actions
     to restore service to the device and/or diagnostics of the device will
     be allowed. The device was put out-of-service by the system only.

Out-of-Service Temporary (OOS-TEMP)
     A hardware unit or circuit that is placed OOS when an associated unit
     or circuit on which it depends is placed OOS. This unit or circuit can
     be returned to INS without being tested. Device is in a temporary
     out-of-service state due to a higher order device being out-of-service.
     Restoral of device without the higher order unit is not allowed. Taking
     the device out-of-service (i.e., OOS-SYS, OOS-MNT) from this state is
     allowed. The device will be automatically restored in service when the
     higher unit is restored to service.

Out-of-Service Test (OOS-TEST)
     The unit or circuit has been placed OOS for testing, which has been
     exercised by a diagnostic program. No call processing functions can
     take place on this circuit while in this state.

Out-Trunks
     The audio paths going to the land network central office which are used
     when making mobile-to-land calls. Information is passed over these
     paths to indicate which land network user is being called.

OUTPLS Table
     The Outpulse Table specifies the following information for the
     outpulsing descriptor table: Physical trunk group; home NPA of the
     telco office in which the physical trunk is connected; the exchange
     codes in the home NPA which are allowed and which can be reached by
     outpulsing seven digits; the exchange codes at the home NPA which are
     allowed and which can be reached by outpulsing 1 + seven digits; and
     the foreign NPAs and exchange codes within these NPAs which are allowed
     to be accessed from the physical trunk group.

OUTRTE
     See Outward Route.

OUTSIG Table
     Provides the parameters which describe the outgoing signaling data
     elements associated with trunk groups.

Outward Route (OUTRTE)
     The Outward Route table is used in Outward Translation. Indexed by
     Physical Route (from either the PHYRTE or CARIER tables), this table
     defines attributes for each outward route. Attributes include the
     Termination Type (land, mobile, CFC, or inter-LATA), Trunk Group to
     route on, Call Diversions if needed, and Call Final Class if needed.

Outward Translation
     The process of determining termination information, based on the world
     number, who made the call, where the call came from, and when the call
     was made. Termination information can consist of a particular trunk or
     carrier used to reach the terminating party, or failure of a call for a
     variety of reasons.

Outway Drivers
     Each outway driver from the TSI is distributed to the corresponding
     main and standby third stage space switch.

Outways
     These are 8.192 MHz serial transmission lines which transmit data from
     the TSI to the third stage switches.

Ovenize
     To include a circuit which provides heat at a steady temperature.

Overflow
     Amount of traffic using alternate routes due to busy conditions on a
     primary route.

Overlay
     For the Special Product: Overlay/Underlay; indicates the smaller
     (inner) cell of an overlay/underlay pair.

Overlay/Underlay
     A Special Product in which a smaller cell is "overlayed" onto a larger
     cell. The overlayed cell's coverage area falls completely within that
     of the underlayed cell, so the overlayed cell's channels can be reused
     at much shorter distances without increasing co-channel interference.

Overload
     Situation occurring when an element is asked to provide more service
     than it is engineered to deliver. Contrast to congestion.

Overload Class
     A class indication given to a mobile subscriber which indicates what
     service will be provided to the mobile during a period when the system
     is in an overload condition or emergency condition. Used with Special
     Product: Overload Class Control.

Overload Class Control
     Two purchasable Special Products which enable a system operator to
     restrict originations, termination, and/or handoffs in particular cells
     or paging areas, based on the subscribers' Overload Class. One SP
     enables control of originations and terminations, another enables
     control of handoffs. Sometimes called "Emergency Overload."

Overload Level
     The highest amplitude of an analog signal for which a PCM code word
     exists.

OVRCL
     Overload Class. A class indication given to a mobile subscriber which
     indicates what service will be provided to the mobile during a period
     when the system is in an overload condition or emergency condition.



+---+
| P |
+---+


P
     Positive.

Pack
     A method to place three or more traffic channels onto each channel of a
     span line.

Packed Binary Coded Decimal (BCD)
     A method of grouping sets of two or more BCD characters into data words
     containing multiples of four bits. The packed BCD words are acted upon
     as single units. The individual 4-bit digit is sometimes called a
     nibble.

Packed Signed Decimal
     A field of numeric data using BCD characters to represent numbers. The
     sign of the field is represented as the right most 4-bits expressed as
     CHEX representing a valid field or DHEX representing an invalid or
     unused field. Packed signed decimal data is always rounded to a
     multiple of 8-bit bytes, padded on the left with leading BCD zeros.

Pad See
     Attenuator.

Page
     1) A message which is broadcast to a group of mobile telephone units
     which uniquely identifies a particular mobile telephone based on the
     information contained in the message. This mobile unit will normally
     acknowledge this message and enter a ringing state. 2) See Memory Page.

Page Acknowledgement
     One of the following: Short Message Page acknowledgment, Short Message
     Page buffer full, or Digital Page acknowledgement. These messages flow
     from the subscriber unit ->BSC->EMX->MCMC.

Page Area
     The area in which the EMX will page the mobile.

Paging Area
     Identifies an area in the IS-41 network to which a home mobile might
     roam.

Paging Channel
     In DYNA TAC systems, a forward control channel which is used to page
     mobile stations and send orders.

PALM
     Parity Alarm

PAM
     See Pulse Amplitude Modulation.

Parallel
     Simultaneous transmission of the bits making up a character or word.

Parallel Differential Interface (PDI) Card
     Provides bi-directional conversion between byte-wide differential
     signals and byte-wide TTL signals. Also called Supergroup Interface
     (SGI) and a Tone Group Interface (TGI) in the Group Multiplexer Unit
     (GMU), Supergroup Switch (SGS), Supergroup Switch Extension (SGE),
     Switch Network Unit (SNU) or Switch Network Extension (SNE).

Parallel Input/Output (PIO) Interface
     Device that is a peripheral to a processor system which provides
     several parallel (8-bit wide) ports for communication and control
     purposes.

Parallel Internodal Link (PINL) Card
     A high-speed communication link between twin processor nodes located
     within 1000 feet of each other. Each PINL card communicates with
     another PINL card to complete the data link. Each PINL card includes a
     dual port to allow use by either processor in its node and is capable
     of communication with two other PINLs. PINLs are also used as twin
     processor links. Also see Internodal Link and Twin Processor Link.

Parallel to Serial Converter
     A device which converts a group of digits into a sequence of pulses.

PARAM
     Parameter

Parent
     A device which controls the enabling of another device.

Parity
     A self-checking code employing binary digits in which the total number
     of ones in each permissible code expression is always even and odd.

Parity Alarm (PALM)
     An alarm generated by a parity decoder indicating the presence of
     incorrect data at its inputs.

Parity Bit
     A binary digit (bit) appended to an array of bits to make the sum of
     all of the ones always odd or always even.

Parsing
     The process of performing syntax analysis of input and converting it
     into EMX internal machine language.

PASSTHRU
     A Tandem software process that allows VME handoffs to go through the
     IS-41 Converter
     Tandem.

Password
     An access word entered at the teleprinter which verifies that the user
     is authorized to establish communications with the EMX. It also
     determines the allowed modes of operation.

Password Table
     Seven byte ASCII representations of each system operator's password.

Patch
     A modification to a computer program to correct errors or add features.

Patch Tape
     A software tape that contains changes to the generic EMX system
     Software Release.

PATHCOM
     Command language interface used to communicate with PATHMON. (Tandem
     Inc.)

PATHMON
     The central control process that executes PATHCOM commands for the
     PATHWAY system operations. (Tandem Inc.)

PATHWAY
     A group of related software tools that enable the user's to develop,
     install, and manage IS-41 Converter
     Tandem on-line transaction processing applications. (Tandem Inc.)

PBX
     Private Branch Exchange.

PC
     Personal computer.

PC
     Point Code.

PCB
     Printed Circuit Board.

PCC
     Power Conversion Cage.

PCH
     Paging Channel. A common access RF channel providing
     point-to-multipoint unidirectional signaling downlink. Provides
     simultaneous transmission to all MSs over a wide paging area.

PCM
     Pulse Code Modulation. Encoding for speech used on the CBSC A+
     interface to the MSC.

PCM Control Link
     Serial transmission paths between the SMI boards and the PCMI boards
     vis the SMP controls on the PCMI.

PCM Tone Generator Test
     Verifies that all tones are operational on the active tone generator.

PCM Word
     An 8-bit code group representing a specific quantized level.

PCMI Board
     See Pulse Code Modulation Interface Board.

PCMI-C
     See Pulse Code Modulation Interface.

PCMI-2
     See Pulse Code Modulation Interface.

PCS
     Personal Communication Services.

PCT
     See Program Control Tables.

PDC
     See Personal Digital Cellular or Power Distribution Cage.

PDC-A Interface
     Transports call processing information between the MM and the MSC.

PDESC
     Process Description

PDF
     See Power Distribution Frame.

PDI
     Parallel Differential Interface

PDN
     Public Data Network.

PE
     Phase encoded.

Peg Count
     A number indicating the use of a device or resource. Each time the
     device or resource is used the peg count is incremented.

PEP
     Peak Envelope Power.

Per-action
     See per-operator.

Per Call Routing Alias
     In the Special Product: Dynamic Roaming, a temporary telephone number
     which exists just long enough for one call to be set up. Used to allow
     automatic delivery of calls between cellular switches using inter-LATA
     carriers.

Performance Management
     Provides ability to monitor application and node statistics.

Per-operator
     To perform the activity on demand. In Trouble Detection, this means the
     TD mechanism is triggered only when the event occurs. The definition
     allows implementation to include software and hardware fault detection
     mechanisms. Software examples are message integrity checks (CRCs,
     packet sequencing, message response timeout, etc.) asserts. Hardware
     examples are parity checks, addressing checks, signaling, timeout
     mechanisms, discrete voltage/frequency measurements, etc.

Perch Channel
     A specific RF carrier used by the MS for signal level measurements. A
     list of perch channels is provided to the MS to monitor downlink RSSI
     during a call. The information is sent to the BTS as a basis of
     handover candidate selection.

Peripheral Interface Adapter (PIA)
     An integrated circuit that provides a universal means of interfacing
     peripheral equipment to a microprocessor.

Personal Digital Cellular (PDC)
     A digital cellular system using TDMA and SC 9600 BTS platforms.

PGING
     Paging

Phi (f) Tone
     In Nordic systems, an out-band pilot tone (approximately 4,000 Hz) used
     to supervise the transmission on the traffic channel during
     conversation.

PHYRTE
     See Physical Route.

Physical Alarm
     An audible, visual, or dry contact alarm.

Physical Route (PHYRTE)
     In the Outward Translation process, a table (and index produced by this
     table) used to determine termination information such as terminating
     trunk. For physical routing (i.e., the route connects to a trunk that
     is connected to the EMX), this table produces a PHYRTE index. When
     Carrier Routing is needed, the index produced by this table becomes the
     index to the CARRTE table (which in turn produces the PHYRTE index).
     The PHYRTE index is the index into the OUTRTE table. Also see Carrier
     Routing.

Pi/4 DQPSK
     Pi/4 Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying.

Pi/4 Shifted QPSK
     Pi/4 Shifted Quadrature Phase Shift Keying.

PIA
     Peripheral Interface Adapter

PID
     Process ID

Pilot Tone Module
     Located in each LPA shelf. Checks the cancellation network, which
     minimizes IM through phase shifting. The module includes a generator
     which feeds a tone into the LPA input and a receiver which checks the
     output to confirm the tone was cancelled. Results are used to adjust
     the phase shifting circuit.

PIN
     Personal Identification Number. The MCMC subscriber's password for
     accessing their voice mail and other personal services.

PINL
     Parallel Internodal Link

PIO
     Parallel Input/Output Interface

PL
     Parallel Load.

PL
     Power Level

Planned Interference
     A cellular reuse concept based on known interference levels within the
     collection of base site coverage areas that combine to make the overall
     service area.

PLL
     Phase Locked Loop

PLMN
     Public Land Mobile Network.

PM
     Performance Management.

POI
     See Point of Interconnect.

Point of Interconnect (POI)
     A place at which the cellular network is connected to the Public
     Switched Telephone Network. A cellular system may have multiple POIs.

Port
     1) The hardware/software data interface to a device, usually from a
     processor. For example, an RS-232C or CCITT Rec. V.24 port for a
     terminal. 2) An audio interface to the switch such as an E&M trunk port
     or an RF channel.

Port Change
     A (sector cell) intra-cell handoff. Because the handoff is between two
     antennas at the same cell site, the EMX does not have to query other
     cells for signal strength information.

Port Connects
     The path between a channel and trunk that will establish the connection
     to enable voice communication.

Posted Date/Time
     The date and time an IPR was logged by its sending program.

Portable
     A hand-held radiotelephone.

POTS
     Plain Old Telephone Service. Telephone service without regard to
     special features like call waiting, call forwarding, etc.

Power Budget Handover
     A MAHO handover, initiated to reduce the mobile battery power level.
     This occurs when a neighboring sector could serve the mobile with a
     lower path loss than the current sector.

Power Distribution Cage (PDC)
     Located in the RF Modem. Houses equipment to distribute power, RF and
     timing/reference signals to the transceiver shelves. For the receive
     function, includes filters, amplifiers and splitters on the Preselector
     and Preselector I/O cards to distribute the signals to the various
     shelves. For the transmit function, includes TX combiners to combine RF
     signals, on a per sector or LPA basis, from the various shelves. The
     AMR cards support alarm reporting. For TDMA, includes a RDM card.

Power Distribution Frame (PDF)
     A separate metal bay that encloses the power supplies for the EMX 2500.

Power Supply Module (PSM)
     Provides a source of regulated 5.25 V dc power for the Common Control
     Complex, Switch Matrix Subsystem, and the T1 Digital Subsystem.

Power Supply Monitor (PSM-1) Board
     Monitors output voltages from the EMX 2500 system power supplies.

Power Level (PL )- In DYNA TAC systems, the mobile station RF power level.
See Numeric Information.

PPC
     Patch Panel Card.

PPS
     Pulses Per Second.

PPS-800
     A Special Products feature that is a wireless telecommunications system
     that provides a single number to a mobile user that can be used at a
     place of business or at a home.

PR
     In DYNA TAC systems, the stored value of the priority level sent on a
     forward control channel in an access priority global action message.
     See Numeric Information.

PRE
     State prior to running the test.

PRE-CUT
     A service state in which a device is not able to be used for any call
     processing functions. Diagnostics may be run on the device and the
     physical hardware must be in lace. Recent change can then be activated
     to place this device into an active cutover state (OOS-MNT).

Pre-error Amplifier
     One of the staged correction amplifier modules located in the LPA
     shelf. Adjusts the amplitude of the RF signals received from the RF
     Modem XCVR to match the LPA carrier, and adjusts the phase 180-degrees.
     When summed with the LPA carrier, including IM, only IM is left.

Preferred Carrier
     A long-distance carrier as specified by a subscriber as a prefix in the
     dialed digits string, usually of the form "10XXX" where "XXX"
     represents the 3-digit carrier ID. The preferred carrier is used for
     the call being dialed, unless Carrier Override is in effect. Also see
     Presubscriber Carrier.

PRELIS
     Pretranslator list. In the Pretranslation process, a table used to
     analyze dialed digits, especially where digit-by-digit analysis is
     unfeasible.

Preselector
     Located at the input of the DYNA TAC base station receiver and used to
     provide selectivity and low-noise gain.

Preselector Card
     Located in the PDC of the RF Modem cabinet. Performs receive band
     filtering, amplification, and 2:1 splitting for up to four receive
     antennas. Outputs routed to the Preselector I/O card. Typically
     supports three sectors per card, one antenna per sector.

Preselector I/O Card
     Located in the PDC of the RF Modem cabinet. Provides an additional 2:1
     split on receive signals from the RCV/Preselect card, which allows six
     receive antennas to connect to the four transceiver and/or CCP shelves.
     Output routed to the MIO card.

Presubscribed Carrier
     A default long-distance carrier, specified by a subscriber as a
     database attribute. This carrier will be used for long-distance calls
     unless a Preferred Carrier is specified or Carrier Override is in
     effect.

Pretranslation
     The first step in the Translation process for all mobile-originated
     (and some land-originated) calls. Its primary function is to determine
     the type of dialing inferred by the dialed digits. Pretranslation
     detects emergency numbers, preferred carriers, codes to activate and
     de-activate special features, etc.

Pretranslator (PX)
     Controls the transfer of mobile dialed digits from the Base Site
     Controller (BSC) (in IMTS and OBL-B systems) to the main translation
     process, which is part of the Subscriber Number Analysis Process
     (SNAP). The PX is responsible for the initial detection of such
     conditions as invalid dialed digit sequences, special dialing codes and
     local/word telephone numbering schemes.

PRETRE
     Pretranslator tree. A table used in the Pretranslation process in which
     a subset of the dialed digits implies a particular type of dialing.

Primary Device
     A device having an associated redundant standby device. In the event of
     failure of the primary device, the standby device is brought into
     service.

Print Priority
     An attribute assigned to each IPR. Every IPR is given a priority of P1
     (most severe), P2, or P3. Display of IPRs can be controlled by print
     priority. P1 priorities cannot be altered; IPRs can be changed from P2
     to P3 or vice versa by the system operator. Also see Information and
     Problem Reporting.

Priority Tables
     Indicates the order in which tasks should be executed. Eight priority
     classes are used:

   * Interrupt Task
   * Clock Task
   * System Tasks
   * Application V Task
   * Application W Task
   * Application X Task
   * Application Y Task
   * EXEC Function Tasks


PRJM
     Project Management.

PRN
     Pursue Routing Number. Identifies a BTS within the NEC-A interface.

PROC
     See Processor Card.

Process
     Program or set of programs that are activated by the Executive. They
     can be activated by incoming messages or by timeouts. All processes are
     uniquely identified by a Process Identifier (PID) and are comprised of
     one or more tasks.

Process ID (PID)
     A unique identifier for a process. See Process.

Process Tables
     Contains PIDs of all software process including:

   * Node Location
   * Process Type
   * Location of Tables (that describe processes)
   * Processor (PROC) Card A basic microprocessor board with additional
     features for fault detection, diagnosis, and memory extension.


Processor States
     The current service state of an EMX processor within a given mode.

Processor Test
     Provided for each processor in the system. The test includes a control
     bus test, an EPROM checksum test, and an interrupt test.

Program
     The set of coded instructions which perform definite tasks in the EMX
     CPU and various peripherals. Referred to as tasks in the EMX system.

Program Backup Tape
     Contains all system software that must be on the system disk for the
     system to operate fully.

Program Control Tables (PCT)
     Table used by the EKOS to control program execution.

Program Load
     The complete set of operational software that is transferred from
     magnetic tape to a particular twin processor node.

Program Loading
     Transferring of programs from one storage media into internal CPU
     memory.

Program Memory
     The data storage area of a computer which contains the instructions
     that tell the computer what operations to perform.

Program Modification Backup Tape
     Contains the original version of program files before the modification
     is entered.

Program Update Tape
     Contains modified versions of existing programs and possibly new
     programs for replacement and/or inclusion on the system disk and
     eventually into a newly-created program backup tape.

Programmable Read Only Memory (PROM)
     A device in which information can be permanently stored. The
     information, once stored, cannot be changed.

Programmable Timer Module (PTM)
     Used to generate the timing required by the system software.

Progress Tones
     Tone signals directed to the telephone user's ear to indicate call
     progress and disposition, including, but not limited to, congestion or
     All Trunks Busy (ATB), called party busy (or line busy tone), ringback,
     and dial tone. Also called Audible Signals.

Progress Tone Generator (PTG or IPTG) Card
     A board in the Tone Signaling Unit (TSU) that provides the digital
     representations used to reconstruct any of several tones or tone pairs
     such as reorder tone, dial tone, etc.

Project Management
     A purchasable Special Product which enables subscribers to assign
     account numbers to individual calls. These numbers will appear on the
     subscriber's itemized bill, allowing the subscriber to classify charges
     as needed for accounting or client billing.

PROM Monitor
     The firmware contained in the on-board EPROM components of the Z8000
     microprocessor boards for the EMX 2500 system.

Prompt
     An indicator displayed at a terminal (teleprinter or similar device)
     informing the maintenance technician or operator that the system is
     ready for input. Typically, this could be a request for the entry of a
     password, a mode name, or a command.

PS
     Power Supply.

PSM
     See Power Supply Module.

PSM-1 Board
     See Power Supply Monitor Board.

PSTN
     Public Switch Telephone Network. The interface from a land line
     subscriber to an EMX.

PSU
     Power Supply Unit.

PSW
     Pure Sine Wave.

PTG
     Progress Tone Generator

PTM
     Pilot Tone Module.

PTM
     Programmable Timer Module

PTR
     Printer.

Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)
     The worldwide network to which all home and business telephones are
     connected.

Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM)
     A time division modulation technique in which signal intelligence is
     represented by a pulse whose amplitude represents the amplitude of the
     modulating wave at a specific instant of time.

Pulse Code Modulation (PCM)
     Process in which the modulating signal is sampled, and the magnitude of
     each sample with respect to a fixed reference is quantized and
     converted by coding to a digital signal. Provides undistorted
     transmission, even in the presence of noise. (See also Mu-Law and
     A-Law.)

Pulse Code Modulation Interface (PCMI) Board
     Interfaces the EMX 2500 system matrix highway and the compatible PCM
     highways to the trunk and service circuits.

Pulse Code Modulation Interface (PCMI-C)
     128 channels and clock.

Pulse Code Modulation Interface (PCMI-2)
     256 channels and no clocks.

PUT
     See PUT/FORCE/STATUS Commands and PUT/FORCE/STATUS Messages.

PUT/FORCE/STATUS Commands
     Statements that can be entered at authorized EMX teleprinters by the
     system operator or that can be generated internally by EMX software
     processes in response to a fault condition.

PUT/FORCE/STATUS Messages
     Reports printed at selected EMX teleprinters in response to commands
     entered by the operator. They inform the system operator as to whether
     the commands were performed and completed.

PVN
     Private Virtual Network.

PWM
     Pulse Width Monitor or Modulator.

PX
     Pretranslator



+---+
| Q |
+---+


QOS
     Quality Of Service. An alarm category which indicates a failure is
     degrading service.

QPSK
     Quadrature Phase Shift Keying.

Quantization
     A process in which the continuous range of values of an input signal is
     divided into non-overlapping sub-ranges and to each sub-range a
     discrete value of the output is uniquely assigned. Whenever the signal
     value falls within a given sub-range, the output has the corresponding
     discrete value.

Quantization Distortion
     The inherent distortion introduced in the process of quantization.

Quantization Level
     The discrete value of the output designating a particular sub-range of
     the input.

Quantizing
     A rounding off process whereby all samples whose amplitudes fall into
     one specific interval are given the same PCM code word.

Queue
     A memory area containing data that are retrieved in the order in which
     they were stored. See FIFO.

Queues
     1) Data structure in which messages are temporarily stored until they
     are retrieved by a software process. EMX queues use first-in-first-out
     (FIFO) method. 2) A series of calls waiting for service. See FIFO.



+---+
| R |
+---+


R
     In DYNA TAC systems, indicates whether registration is enabled or not.

R2BR
     MFC-R2 Backward Receiver

R2FR
     MFC-R2 Forward Receiver

R2G
     MFC-F2 Generator

Radio Channel Audio Looparound (RCAL)
     A feature of EMX to be used as a tool for the testing of audio paths
     between the EMX and the radio channel at the base site. May be used
     with the test mobile feature to isolate loss of audio path failures to
     EMX, BSC, or radio channel equipment.

Radio Channel Test (RCT)
     A tool for the testing of audio paths between the EMX and the radio
     channel at the base site. May be used with the test mobile feature to
     isolate loss of audio path failures to EMX, BSC, or radio channel
     equipment.

Radio Frequency
     A term applied to the transmission of electromagnetically radiated
     information from one point to another, usually using air or vacuum as
     the transmission medium. An electromagnetic wave frequency intermediate
     between audio frequencies and infrared frequencies used in radio and
     television transmission.

Radio Frequency Channel Maintenance (RMAINT)
     The mode of teleprinter operation that authorizes the operator to
     change the service states of radio frequency channels and base site
     controllers.

Random Access Memory (RAM)
     A type of memory in which information can be stored, retrieved and
     modified. This type of memory is generally volatile (i.e., its contents
     are lost if power is removed).

Random Access Memory Card (RAM1)
     The primary memory of the twin processor. It provides 512k of memory,
     and a parity checking circuit.

RANN
     Recorder Announcer

RCB
     Recent Change Block

RCC
     Radio Common Carriers.

RCF
     Read Control Filler Message. Identifies whether the mobile station must
     read a control-filler message before accessing a system on a reverse
     control channel. See Numeric Information.

RCH
     Radio Channel Housekeeping.

RCI
     Radio Channel Interface

RCIP
     RCI Power (IMTS only)

RCP
     See Multifrequency/Dual Tone Multifrequency Receiver Processor.

RCR Standard
     Research and Development Center for Radio Communication standard; an
     interface for PDC.

RCV
     Receive.

RCT
     See Radio Channel Test.

RCVR
     Receiver.

RCVR-P
     See Multifrequency/Dual Tone Multifrequency Receiver Processor.

RDF
     Remote Database Facility. This is a Tandem Platform product.

RDM Card
     Reference Distribution Module card. Located in the PDC of the RF Modem
     cabinet. Provides a stable 3 MHz reference signal to transceivers to
     control air interface frequency stability for TDMA systems.

RDV
     Rapid Deployment Vehicle.

Read Control Filler (RCF) Message
     In DYNA TAC systems, identifies whether the mobile station must read a
     control-filler message before accessing a system on a reverse control
     channel. See Numeric Information.

Read Only Memory (ROM)
     Memory that can only be read and not written to; normally non-volatile
     storage (i.e., when power is turned off, the memory is not lost).

Real Time Clock (RTC)
     A hardware device which keeps track of real time in date, hours,
     minutes, seconds. The primary function of the EMX real time clock
     system is to provide an accurate source of time-of-day and date
     information to other processes within the EMX. It also provides a set
     of interval timer functions for generating statistics or activating
     recent changes.

Real Time Clock (RTC) Messages
     Formatted messages generated at regular intervals which indicate the
     time of day and date (Gregorian and Julian).

REC
     Receive Error Condition.

RECC
     Reverse Control Channel

Receive Filter
     Located in the SIF. Reduces out-of-band signals.

Receive Multicoupler
     See multicoupler.

Receiver Bay
     A bay of the DYNA TAC base station suite which accommodates the receive
     equipment for up to 16 voice channels. The receiver bay includes the RF
     front end, the first mixer modules, the matrix modules, the voice i-f
     modules, the scan receiver and commutating switch modules, the
     injection synthesizer, the 6-way splitter, and the signaling i-f
     module.

Receiver Injection Synthesizer Module
     Used in the DYNA TAC base station to supply the first injection signal
     for the first mixer modules via the 6-way splitter module.

Recent Change
     An approach to adding, detecting or changing data structures in the EMX
     without halting computer operation.

Recent Change Block (RCB)
     Random access memory that contains all the information necessary to
     update one or more data structures in write-protected memory.

Recent Change Blocks
     Data structures containing a single recent change entry. Each entry
     describes a single action (add, change, deny service) for a single
     range of parameters (mobile IDs, foreign groups, table entries) on a
     single data structure (Subscriber File, Feature Package Table).

Recent Change Messages
     Formatted messages containing additions, changes, or deletions to
     subscriber or system data bases. Upon completion of the change process,
     a report is printed at selected teleprinters.

Reconfiguration
     In the EMX system, the act of changing the state of a piece of hardware
     to adjust for hardware changes or malfunctions. Reconfiguration can be
     done by the operator through maintenance commands, or automatically by
     the EMX equipment when it detects a fault. Reconfiguration does not
     refer to normal state changes required for call processing.

Reconfiguration Messages
     Formatted messages identifying EMX components which have experienced a
     change in service state. Reconfigurations usually cause alarm reports
     to be printed at selected teleprinters and an alarm indicator is
     activated on alarm and status panels.

Record
     A collection of related information (in a database) which is treated as
     a single unit.

Record Count
     Number of records written to the magnetic tape. This count is used in
     Header, Trailer, and Time Control Records. The count is reset at
     midnight and at the start of each tape.

Recorder Announcer (RANN)
     Used to inform the subscriber, when necessary, of conditions preventing
     the completion of a call. Called Drum Intercept Announcer (DIA) in some
     EMX systems.

Redundancy
     Duplication of a resource to provide a backup of the resource.

Reference (REF)
     A timing pulse that defines the beginning of each PCM multiframe.
     Reference is generated on the CLK card.

Reference Oscillator Module
     Used in the DYNA TAC base station to provide two independent sources of
     the 3 MHz reference signal for use by both the BSC and the SAT
     generator modules.

Refresh Alarms Display
     An initialize alarms display, followed by an update of all the variable
     fields to reflect the current alarm status.

Refresh Alarm MMI
     Performs the following operations at the CRT at which the MMI is
     issued: initialize the CRT; initialize the format of the alarms region,
     and updates all fields to reflect the current alarms.

REGID
     The stored value of the last registration number (REGID) received on a
     forward control channel. See Numeric Information.

REGINCR
     Identifies increments between registrations by a mobile station. See
     Numeric Information.

Region Code (Regional Identity Code)
     Used with international dialing to route calls to a particular
     continent (zone). It is the first digit of an international number,
     followed by a country code and national number:

  1. North America, Caribbean, and Hawaii
  2. Africa
  3. Europe
  4. Europe
  5. South America
  6. Australia
  7. Russia
  8. East Asia
  9. Far East and Middle East.


REGISTR
     Registration

Registered Mobile
     Mobile whose primary home area is a specific EMX. A registered mobile
     has home or roam status depending upon which area he is in at the time
     a call is made.

Registration
     The steps by which a mobile station identifies itself to a land station
     as being active in the system at the time the message is sent to the
     land station.

Registration
     The process of a MS registering its location with the MSC in order to
     make or receive calls. This occurs whenever the MS first activates or
     moves into a new service area.

Registration Identification (REGID)
     In DYNA TAC systems, the stored value of the last registration number
     (REGID) received on a forward control channel. See Numeric Information.

Registration Increment (REGINCR)
     In DYNA TAC systems, identifies increments between registrations by a
     mobile station. See Numeric Information.

Relay Process
     Process by which messages are routed by the EXEC to other processes
     that have one PID but are resident in all EMX nodes.

Release
     The process of removing a mobile from the TCH or CAC, at the network,
     switch, and cellular levels as required.

Release Request
     In DYNA TAC systems, a message sent from a mobile station to a land
     station indicating that the user desires to disconnect the call.

REMOTE
     IPR log type for base site (cell site) IPRs.

Remote Equipment
     All equipment beyond the BSLK processors of the EMX 2500 including:
     BSLK/BSC data links, BSCs, RF equipment, and mobile equipment.

Remote Frame Alarm
     An alarm condition which exists whenever the VGI senses a far end frame
     alarm condition.

Remote Memory-3 (RM-3) Board
     Functions as an expansion memory to complement the on-board Random
     Access Memory (RAM) of the MP-x series of the EMX 2500 microcomputers.
     This board accommodates 64k or 256k of dynamic RAM (DRAM).

Remote Multiframe Alarm
     An alarm condition which exists whenever the VGI senses a far end
     multiframe alarm condition.

Remote Switch Unit (RSU)
     A stand alone EMX switch controlled by a Host EMX system via a modem.

Remote Switching Terminal (RST)
     A digital switching unit located at a distance from its host digital
     Central Office which allows a number of subscribers to be connected to
     the Central Office by means of a smaller number of trunks.
     Analog-to-Digital conversion takes place at the RST and switching is
     accomplished on a direct digital basis at the Central Office. The
     remote subscribers have all features available to subscribers within
     the host office as long as the link to the host office remains intact.

REMX
     Remote EMX

Reorder Tone
     A signal (120 ipm) indicating the call attempt has encountered a busy
     route. See All Trunks Busy.

Reporting Period
     A reporting period is one-half hour long and ends on the hour and half
     hour. At the end of a reporting period every IPR which has reached the
     exception state is reset to the enabled state.

Reports
     General term used for a hard copy teleprinter output. The Teleprinter
     Executive (TEX) software formats messages from other software processes
     into alarm and status, maintenance, and recent change reports.

REQ
     Request

Request (REQ)
     The request signal is an active low pulse which defines the start of
     state one of a Matrix Control Bus cycle.

Request-to-Send (RTS)
     A handshaking signal used with communication links, especially EIA
     RS-232C or CCITT Rec. V.24 to indicate (from a transmitter to a
     receiver) that data are ready for transmission. Also see Clear-to-Send.

Reset Alarm MMI
     Turns off an alarm for a given alarm type.

Restart Messages
     Messages printed at teleprinters which indicate that restart procedures
     have been initiated and/or completed due to manual or automatic reset.

Retrofits
     Revised or updated versions of hardware or software which can be put
     into EMX systems already in operation.

Reuse Group
     A group of DYNA TAC radio channels which are divided according to their
     frequency. Two reuse groups are established to minimize interference
     between adjacent channels used in adjacent cells.

Reuse Pattern
     The minimum number of cells required in a pattern before channel
     frequencies are reused, to prevent interference. Varies between cell
     configuration type (omni/omni, etc.) and channel type (traffic, perch).
     The pattern shows assignments of adjacent channels to minimize
     interference between cells and sectors within the pattern area.

Reverse Block
     A condition on an incoming trunk showing the other end of the trunk
     that the EMX is unable to receive calls at the present time. Applies to
     in-trunks and out-trunks.

Reverse Control Channel (RECC)
     In DYNA TAC systems, the control channel used from a mobile station to
     a land station.

Reverse Voice Channel (RVC)
     In DYNA TAC systems, the voice channel used from a mobile station to a
     land station.

Revertive Call
     In mobile telephony, a call made from one mobile to another on the same
     radio channel. Push-to-talk mode is used by the mobiles; the base
     station acts as a repeater.

RF
     See Radio Frequency.

RF Front End
     The DYNA TAC base station receiver input section consisting of
     preselector and 4-way splitter modules.

RF Loss
     An indication of an established mobile call that is dropped,
     disconnected without a request by either party. Causes include a
     sustained radio link failure.

RF Modem
     RF Modem cabinet, part of the BTS. Provides the interface between the
     CBSC and the RF air interface. Contains the PDC, I/O panel, and four
     Transceiver Shelves.

RFDS
     RF Diagnostic Sub-System. Located in the SIF but controlled by the
     CBSC. Includes a GLI card, XCVR, RF converter, and ASU. Monitors
     performance of the BTS: tests cell site equipment functionality based
     upon forward and reverse output signal measurements in the directional
     couplers; also simulates a mobile transceiver, generating and receiving
     RF signals. Tests include RF power output, antenna VSWR, BER, CNR, SSI,
     carrier leakage, transmit IMD, and signaling verification. Can be
     operated remotely a the OMC-R or manually at the BTS via the LMF. Test
     results are sent to the CBSC and interpreted there.

RFHW
     RF Hardware troubleshooting procedure.

RGLI
     RFDS Group Line Interface.

RIM
     Radio Interface Module.

RISC
     Reduced Instruction Set Commands.

RISSD
     The IPR sending program which contains the IPR library function.

RM-3 Board
     See Remote Memory-3 Board.

RMAINT
     Radio Frequency Channel Maintenance Mode

RMR
     Roamer

RNMP
     Remote Network Management Protocol. Interface between the OMC and the
     MM.

RNR
     Reception Not Ready.

ROAM
     Roamer Access Number.

Roam Index
     A parameter assigned to each subscriber to indicate what type of
     handling is required to process calls when operating in a foreign
     system (e.g., local, intersystem roaming-date link, or default
     foreign).

Roam Package
     In the Special Product: Custom Roaming, a set of EMXs and paging
areas
     in which a subscriber wishes to receive pages. As with Feature Package
     and Coverage Package, a finite number of these sets are defined by the
     cellular carrier, and each subscriber is assigned one of these sets.

Roamer
     A mobile station which operates in a cellular system other than the one
     from which service is subscribed.

Roamer File
     In subscribers recent change (SIM) this file contains individual
     mobile-IDs from other mobile telephone systems that are to be given
     some degree of service.

Roaming Subscriber
     See Roamer.

Rolled Back
     A term used when returning a database to its original state when an
     operation is not successfully completed.

ROM
     Read Only Memory

Rotary Dial
     Telephone signaling which uses interrupted pulses to pass information.

Rotary Hunt Group
     The arrangement of two or more line/trunks so a call group is
     automatically routed to the first non-busy line (or trunk) of the
     group.

ROTL
     Remote Office Test Line

Router
     LAN router.

Routing Data
     Information identifying the path connection required to complete a call
     to a mobile unit, to land party, or to a mobile unit from another
     mobile unit. Includes translated trunk/channel numbers, mobile numbers,
     ANI, and paging data as required.

Routining Subsystem
     A series of commands available on the EMX 2500 which provide a
     sophisticated test facility and convenient user interface. The
     following features are provided: ability to routine all devices in the
     office; ability to test a set of devices; provide a detailed and
     summary report; provide device selection criteria; provide device
     disposition options; provide busy device handling; and provide test
     time limitations.

RPC
     Remote Procedure Call. A mechanism which allows procedures residing on
     one computer platform to be invoked by a program residing on a
     potentially different platform.

RR
     Reception Ready.

RS-232C
     Refers to a standard for serial data transmission (International
     equivalent
     CCITT Rec. V.24).

RSSI
     Received Signal Strength Indicator. A parameter returned from a
     transceiver that gives a measure of the RF signal strength between the
     MS and BTS, either uplink or downlink.

RST
     See Remote Switching Terminal.

RSU
     Remote Switch Unit

RTC
     Real-Time Clock

RTG
     Routing

RTR
     See LAN router.

RTS
     EMX Remote Trunk Switch

RTS
     Request-to-Send

RVC
     Reverse Voice Channel

RVL
     Radio Voice Link.

RWR
     Request with Response.

RX
     Receive or receiver.

RX Matrix Card
     Located in the RF Modem Transceiver Shelf for TDMA systems. Under
     control of the XCVR, connects RX signals between the XCVRs and the
     appropriate sector in the SIF. Receives antenna signals from the MIO,
     amplifies and splits them. Routes two signals to each XCVR for
     diversity.

RXCVR
     RFDS XCVR.

RXLEV
     An indication of received signal level based on the RSSI, either uplink
     or downlink. One of the causes for handover. This occurs when the RSSI
     is below the confidence percentage of averages threshold level.

RXQUAL
     An indication of the received signal quality based on the BER, either
     uplink or downlink. One of the causes for handover. This occurs when
     the RSSI drops to a dangerously low level.



+---+
| S |
+---+


S
     In DYNA TAC systems, identifies whether the mobile must send its serial
     number when accessing a system. See Numeric Information.

S/S
     See sector-sector.

SABME
     Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode Extended.

SABMEI
     Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode Extended with Information.

SACCH
     Slow ACCH. An auxiliary control channel appended to the TCH used by the
     MS for reporting RSSI and signal quality measurements. Transmits
     signaling information and user packet data.

SAFEPATH
     A Tandem system utility program used in conjunction with PATHWAY to
     create new online system applications. SAFEPATH supplies generic menus
     so that the user does not need to create a new application from
     "scratch". The user can use the menus supplied by SAFEPATH, or use the
     menus as a base screen to create new menus.

SACK
     See Subordinate Acknowledge.

SAGE
     A Sage Instruments Model 930A Communications Test Set, used in Radio
     Channel Test.

SAL
     Stand-Alone Loader

SALT
     System Audio Loopback Test..

Sample
     The value of a particular characteristic of a signal at a chosen
     instant.

SAP
     Service Access Point.

SAPI
     Service Access Point Indicator or Identifier.

SAS
     Status-Alarm-Signal

SAS
     System Alarm and Status

SAS2
     System Alarm and Status, Version 2

SAT
     Supervisory Audio Tone

SAT Color Code (SCC)
     In DYNA TAC systems, a digital number which is stored and used to
     identify which supervisory audio tone frequency a mobile station should
     be receiving. See Numeric Information.

SAT Generator Module
     Used in the DYNA TAC base stations to generate the 15 kHz reference
     signal and the supervisory audio tones for the base station and BSC.
     See also Supervisory Audio Tones.

SAW
     Surface Acoustic Wave.

SB
     Synchronization Burst, messages sent between the BTS and MS.

SB2
     Synchronization Burst 2. An acknowledgement message passed between the
     MS and BTS.

SB4
     Synchronization Burst 4. An acknowledgement message passed between the
     MS and BTS.

SBE
     SNC Bus Extender

SBP
     Signal Bit Processor

SBPR
     Redundant Signal Bit Processor

SBT
     SNC Bus Terminator

SBY
     Standby

SBY-DUP
     Standby-Duplex

SBY-REST
     Standby-Restore

SBY-TNS
     Standby-Time Not Set

SBY-TS
     Standby-Time Set

SC
     Switch Control Processor

SC
     System Code

SC 9600
     Fourth generation of Motorola cellular infrastructure equipment.
     Comprised of CBSC, OMC-R, LMF, and multiple BTS sites.

Scan
     The procedure by which a mobile station examines the signal strength of
     each forward control channel and selects the channel with the strongest
     signal.

Scan of Channels
     In DYNA TAC systems, the procedure by which a mobile station examines
     the signal strength of each forward control channel and selects the
     channel with the strongest signal.

Scan Processor (SCN)
     In DYNA TAC systems, the SCN measures every mobile's signal strength on
     each receive antenna so that all mobiles can be received via the best
     antenna choice and can be set to the correct power (transmit) level.
     The SCN also measures the SAT frequency of mobiles to verify that it is
     making its measurements on the correct mobile. The SCN is capable of
     receiving any mobile frequency.

Scanner
     Software polling task which queries an input/output device for input.

Scanning Receiver (SRX)
     Used in Nordic (NMT) systems to perform signal strength measurements on
     a channel, as ordered by the EMX (via CCP-to-CSI).

SCAP
     SC 9600 Application Protocol.

SCB
     See Subordinate Control Bus.

SCC
     1. SAT Color Code. 2. Signaling Channel Controller (LD Base Station)

SCE
     Software Creation Environment Service.

SCCH
     Single Cell Signaling Channel. A common access RF channel providing
     point-to-point bi-directional signaling up- and downlink. Used when the
     location of a MS is known. Allows transmission to MSs within individual
     cells.

SCCP
     Signaling Connection Control Part. The fourth level of SS& standard
     architecture, used to transport the BSS Application Part (BSSAP).

SCE
     Switch Control Unit Extension

SCEP
     Switch Control Extension Power

Scheduled Jobs
     EMX software process and accompanying data which have been queued for
     execution by the EXEC process.

SCI
     See Status Control Interface.

SCI
     Switch Control Interface

SCI Port
     Serial Communications Interface port on AMR microcontroller.
     Communicates with XC GPROCs. Operates at 4800 baud rate.

SCIP
     Serial Communications Interface Peripheral

SCM
     (1) See Status Control Manager. (2) See Station Class Mark.

SCN
     Scan Processor (part of BSC)

SCP
     (1) Service Control Point. (2) Site Control Processor (part of BSC).

SCP
     1) Signal Control Point (software terminology) 2) System Control Panel
     (hardware terminology)

SCR
     Silicon Controlled Rectifier.

Scrambler (SCX)
     Optional equipment used to provide voice security. The scrambler is a
     device for encoding transmitted voice communications signals so as to
     render them unintelligible, and for decoding previously encoded signals
     so as to render them to an intelligible condition.

Scratchpad Memory
     Read/write memory that can be used for any purpose by an application
     program.

SCS
     See Simplex Coldstart.

SCSI
     Small Computer Serial Interface.

SCSIIM
     SC 9600 System Initialization and Integrity Monitor.

SCT
     See System Control Table.

SCU
     Switch Control Unit

SDCC
     Single DC Converter module located in the MM and OMC-R. It supplies
     regulated DC power.

SDBM
     Subscriber Database Management.

SDHW
     Single Device Hardware troubleshooting procedure.

SDP
     See MF/DTMF Sender Processor.

Search
     The process of scanning and displaying the call records as specified by
     the operator.

Search from Beginning/Search from End
     Specifying search direction is a technique used to minimize glare on
     two-way trunks. "Search from beginning" indicates that the search for
     an idle member of a two-way trunk group start from the beginning of the
     member list (smaller to larger member numbers). "Search from end" is
     the opposite, as the search algorithm attempts to select a free member
     starting with the largest member in the group and working toward the
     smallest.

Sector
     A segment of an RF coverage area.

Sector of Origin Routing
     A Translation technique in which the originating mobile's location
     helps determine the routing of the call. Particularly useful for
     emergency calls.

Sector-Receive Antenna System
     In DYNA TAC systems, six 60░ directional antennas are used at each base
     site to get the additional gain required to serve portables with the
     same quality signals as mobiles.

Sector/Sector
     Sector antenna configuration where both uplink and downlink are
     sectors. May be either six 60-degree sectors or three 120-degree
     sectors.

Sector-Transmit/Sector Cell
     Terms that refer to a DYNA TAC base site RF configuration in which the
     voice channels are configured for both sector-transmit as well as
     sector-receive, with each sector comprising a 60░ segment. This cell is
     used for very high density systems.

Segment
     A 10 millisecond period started by an interrupt. Segments are used for
     internal EXEC timing and clocked task synchronization.

Seizure
     A signal transmitted by one switching system to another switching
     system. This signal is transmitted from the first system to the second
     system to initiate an action like originating a call. The signal is
     transmitted to acknowledge a previous request or to relay the
     occurrence of an event, like an answered call, from one system to
     another.

Seizure Precursor
     In DYNA TAC systems, the initial digital sequence transmitted by a
     mobile station to a land station on a reverse control channel.

SELCD
     Selective Call Delivery.

Selective Call Delivery
     Allows the operator to set from which visited regions within the IS-41
     network that an EMX home subscriber may receive call delivery.

Selective Call
     Coded signal sent by the IBSC in OBL-B systems to the mobile that
     consists of the mobile's identification number and the channel command
     number. This signal causes the mobile to change from the calling
     channel to the speaking channel specified by the channel command.

Sender Processor (SNDR-P)
     Processor that manages sender circuits which are used to outpulse
     MF/DTMF digits to remote switches. Also see Multifrequency/Dual Tone
     Multifrequency Sender Processor.

Serial Bus
     TTY bus used by the GPROC for communications with half-size cards and
     for cards within the XC cabinet which are not in the XC shelf.

Serial Communications Controller (SCC)
     Processor that controls the serial interface to CAMP terminals. The SCC
     hardware is used within the SFCC and an synchronous communications
     handler within the EKOS operating system in the SFCC.

Serial Communications Interface Peripheral (SCIP) Card
     This card can appear as an intelligent peripheral, performing processor
     functions on transiting information in the network. The card allows for
     high level link protocols and error recovery and handling for the link.

Serial DAS
     A purchasable Special Product which enables the transmission of billing
     and statistics records to a remote computer over an HDLC datalink. Any
     remote computer using LAPB protocol can be used.

Serial Device Driver
     The logic within EKOS which actually interfaces with each CAMP
     terminal.

Serial Four-Channel Communications Controller (SFCC-1) Board
     Provides four full-duplex, RS-232 serial I/O data channels. Supports
     local CRT terminals, printers and modems as well as high-speed
     synchronous data link channels.

Serial Four-Channel Communications Processor (SFCC)
     Where the Terminal Handler and the Serial Device Driver reside.

Serial Internodal Link (SINL)
     The SINL card provides serial data communications between two EMXs
     separated by long distances using high speed synchronous modems.

Serial Link
     One of four communications paths between SCIP and peripheral equipment.
     The information on the link is sent serially in a bit-synchronous
     format.

Service-Affecting
     An activity that results in the loss or degradation of service to at
     least one subscriber.

Service Area
     One of a number of areas in an EMX system that has a particular set of
     home mobiles and a dialing plan for home and roaming mobiles.

Service Circuit
     A group of hardware devices that includes recorder-announcement
     equipment, receivers, and senders.

Service Code
     A numeric code, usually in the form of N11 (N is any digit 2 through
     9), designating a supplementary telephone service.

Service Manager (SVM)
     Provides overall management authority for all in-service service
     circuits. Specific functions include: allocates service circuits as
     directed by the Call Processing Manager; queues for service circuits as
     required when a specified service circuit type is not available;
     interfaces with the Service Circuit processors to reserve and idle
     specific service circuit processors to perform a specific function;
     interface with the Switch Matrix Processor to make and break specific
     switch paths and to enable or disable specific tones and treatments,
     and collect system activity data.

Service Management Subsystem
     Consists of the maintenance test frame (MTF), line/trunk subsystem,
     service circuit subsystem, switch matrix subsystem, tone recorded
     announcement, and tone generator.

Service States
     Operational status of telephone line signaling devices and EMX hardware
     components.

Server Class
     1. A unique number assigned to each member of a group of duplicate
     copies of DMXIO or XNETIO processes that are used by IS-41
     applications. All processes of a particular server class are executed
     from the same object file. Each server class is assigned a unique Task
     ID. 2. A unique name assigned to each member of a group of duplicate
     copies of HMI servers that run under PATHWAY. All processes of a
     particular server class are executed from the same object file.

Session
     Resident program in the COMM processor which routes the input and
     output between the CAMP terminals and the Command Interpreter, when the
     Terminal Handler programs reside in SFCC processors.

SF
     Single Frequency

SFCC
     See Serial Four-Channel Communications Processor.

SFCC-1
     See Serial Four-Channel Communications Controller Board.

SFT
     Subscriber File Transfer.

SGE
     Supergroup Switch Extension

SGEP
     Supergroup Switch Extension Power

SGI
     Supergroup Interface

SGIR
     Redundant Supergroup Interface

SGRP
     Supergroup

SGS
     Supergroup Switch

SGSP
     Supergroup Switch Power

Shared Random Access Memory (SRAM)
     A RAM card whose function is shared between both sides of an EMX twin
     processor node (SCU, DBP, CCP).

Shelf
     Generic name used to describe a mechanical enclosure that holds a
     number of cards. One or more shelves are mounted in a frame.

SID
     System Identification

SID (System Identification Number)
     An identification number assigned to a cellular telephone switching
     system (EMX or MSC).

SIDp
     System Identification;
     Permanently Stored (Mobile)

SIDr
     System Identification; Received

SIDs
     System Identification; Stored

SIDs-p
     System Identification; Semi-Permanently Stored (Mobile)

Side (A or B)
     In equipment with two independent control systems, as in an electronic
     switching system, it is the designation that is given to each of the
     control systems. The designation used in an EMX system is based on
     viewing the unit from the front; where the control system components
     (boards) are located in the left portion of an equipment rack is
     designated as Side-A and those located on the right is Side-B.

Sidetone
     An attenuated portion of the transmit audio returned to the originator.

Sierra 411A
     Digital access test set used in Radio Channel Test.

SIF Cabinet
     Site Interface cabinet. One of the BTS cabinets, housing RF assemblies.
     Contains directional couplers, duplexers (or receive filters), receive
     multicouplers, and the RFDS. Interfaces RF signals between the antennas
     and the BTS. Routes TX signals from the LPA to the antennas and routes
     RX signals from the antennas to the RF Modem.

SIG
     Signaling Channel Controller (part of BSC)

Signal Bit Processor (SBP-24 or SBP-30)
     The main function of the SBP card is to extract line signaling from
     inbound data and to insert line signaling in outbound data.

Signal-to-Noise Ratio
     The ratio of the magnitude of the signal to that of the noise with no
     signal present, usually expressed in dB.

Signal Operated Noise Adjusting Device (SONAD)
     In some systems, used in the mobile-to-land audio path to minimize the
     audible effects of path loss variations and poor signal-to-noise ratio.

Signal Strength Indication (SSI)
     A value representing the received signal strength for each channel from
     each sector antenna. This value is used by the BSC to determine which
     are the two strongest sectors (so they can be supplied to the
     maximal-ratio combiner in the voice I-F module) and by the EMX to
     determine inter-cell handoffs.

Signaling
     The exchange of electrical information (other than by speech)
     specifically concerned with the establishment and control of connection
     and management supervision in a communication network.

Signaling Channel
     A channel used by a land station to transmit digital control
     information (including pages) to a mobile station, and a radio channel
     used by mobile stations to access a system to obtain service and to
     transmit control data to a land station. The land station's
     transmitting channel is called the forward control channel; the mobile
     station's transmitting channel is called the reverse control channel.

Signaling Channel Controller (SCC)
     In the LD series base station, controls the cell site signaling
     transceiver, decodes and corrects data received from the mobile and
     makes an initial estimate of the mobile's signal strength for use in
     call setup.

Signaling Channel Controller (SIG)
     The SIG ends paging and overhead messages to mobiles under control of
     the site control processor in DYNA TAC systems. It decodes and corrects
     data received from mobiles, and uses information from the RF equipment
     to make an initial estimate of the mobile's direction.

Signaling I-F Module
     Used in the DYNA TAC base station to recover signaling data and SSI
     from the calling channel for the BSC.

Signaling Link
     See link.

Signaling Protocol
     The method of coordinating signaling between two switching machines. A
     signaling protocol is used to ensure information about a call is
     transmitted when the receiving machine is prepared to receive the
     information. Under the dial tone signaling protocol, the transmitting
     switch will not pass digits to the receiving switch until the receiving
     switch has returned dial tone. The receiving switch will not return
     dial tone until it has completed the necessary processing, like
     assigning the attaching a digit receiver to prepare for incoming digit
     reception.

Signaling System 7 (SS7)
     An open-ended common channel signaling standard which defines the
     protocol for signaling used by switches within the digital network.
     Used over a wide variety of digital circuit switched networks. Provides
     internal control and network intelligence.

Signaling Time Slot
     A time slot starting at a particular phase in each frame and allocated
     to the transmission of signaling.

Signaling Tone
     In DYNA TAC systems, a 10 kHz tone transmitted by a mobile station on a
     voice channel to: (1) confirm orders, (2) signal flash requests, and
     (3) signal release requests.

SIL
     Signaling Link Code.

Simplex State
     This is a state of the twin processor node and control system in which
     there is only an active processor, such that in the event of a
     processor-related failure, the system may go down.

Single Frequency (SF) Signaling
     Single frequency signaling, either in-band or out-of-band. Used for
     supervisory signaling.

Single Trunk Circuit Outage
     A class of outage where a single trunk circuit outage affects service
     on an individual circuit originating or terminating on the EMX 2500
     system. This type of outage pertains to a hardware fault of a
     particular trunk interface circuit.

SIPL
     See System Initial Program Load.

SIT
     System Image Tape

Site Control Processor (SCP)
     The SCP controls all aspects of base site operation in DYNA TAC
     systems. The SCP uses its peripheral processors to provide all call
     related services:

   * Allocates voice channels.
   * Communicates with the EMX.
   * Handles details of call setup and termination:

-
     Schedules periodic vehicle location for active mobiles.
-
     Optimizes base station and mobile operating parameters.
-
     Initiates or accepts mobile handoffs.

   * Allows its operator to conduct several diagnostic tests from a
     terminal.
   * Controls operation of SCN, SIG, and VCP.


Site Identification Number
     A unique six digit number assigned to each switching system.

Site Relay (SRLY)
     Customer assigned external alarm or status relay (e.g., intruder alarm,
     smoke alarm, etc.). Four site relays can be detected by each SCP.

Site Supervisory Unit (SSU)
     Used in Nordic (NMT) systems for two purposes:

  1. Interfaces to the Scanning Receiver (SRX) to take signal strength
     measurements needed to determine the cell with the best reception (for
     handoffs).
  2. Activates all site control functions (as ordered by the EMX) and sends
     alarm indicators to the EMX. The SSU can communicate with the EMX in
     two ways: either via a data line, a channel signaling interface, etc.,
     or via a Base Control Unit (BCU) at the same site and a BCU-SSU
     communication link.


Site Relay
     Customer assigned external alarm or status relay (e.g., intruder alarm,
     smoke alarm, etc.). Four site relays can be detected by each SCP.

Six-Way Splitter
     Used in the base station to to distribute the first injection signal to
     the six first mixer modules.

SLC
     Signaling Link Code

SLM
     1. Service Logic Module. 2. Software Load Management. Provides operator
     with facilities to load a BSS, manage the integrity of loads, record
     changes to a load during emergency repair, provide a central repository
     for loads, and track status of installed and activated loads.

SLNK
     Serial Link

Slot
     In time divided serial digital communications, a single block of bits
     with a frame. For instance, a T1 frame consists of 24 slots which in
     turn consists of eight bits each.

SM
     Short Message. The pre-defined textual message from the VRU or textual
     message entered by a caller at an user terminal delivered to the
     subscriber unit as a page. A short message can be up to 14 characters
     in length.

SMI-1
     See Switch Matrix Interface Board.

SMM
     See Switch Matrix Manager.

SMP
     Switch Maintenance Port

SMP
     See Switch Matrix Processor.

SMT
     See Switch Matrix Tester.

SNAP
     Subscriber Number Analysis Process

SNC
     Switch Network Controller

SNDR
     See Multifrequency/Dual Tone Multifrequency Sender Processor.

SNDR-P
     See Multifrequency/Dual Tone Multifrequency Sender Processor.

SNE
     Switch Network Extension

SNEP
     Switch Network Extension Power

SNU
     Switch Network Unit

SNUP
     Switch Network Unit Power

SONAD
     Sound Operated Noise Attenuating Device

Source group
     In the Inward Translation process, used to classify the originating
     caller (generally by location). Otherwise identical calls may be
     processed differently depending on the caller's source group.

SP
     1. Special Product. 2. Switching Point (same as SSP). 3. System Paid
     Feature

SP Card Service Processor card
     Located in the MM and OMC-R.

Space Switch (MUX)
     Each MUX board accommodates two first stage and two third stage
     switches in the three-stage switch matrix.

Span Line
     A 4-wire digital line carrying information for a group of time-division
     multiplexed PCM channels. See also T1.

Speaking Channel
     Except for the selective call signal transmitted to the mobile, all
     calls are set up, made and cleared on the speaking channels in OBL-B
     systems. Thirty-eight (38) duplex channels, numbers 1 through 18, and
     20 through 39 are available as speaking channels. Speaking channel and
     command channel are similar terms identifying one of the duplex channel
     numbers stated above. Speaking channel refers to mobile-to-IBSC
     communications while command channel refers to IBSC-to-mobile
     communications.

Special Product (SP)
     A feature that is not part of the base product. Special Products are
     purchasable features which offer extra functionality and/or capacity.
     In the case of switch features, special Products are purchased by the
     cellular carrier on a per-switch basis; some of the features can in
     turn be sold to subscribers on an individual basis, while other
     features affect all subscribers. Some examples include
     Overlay/Underlay, Hot-Line Mobiles, Custom Roaming, and many more.

Specify
     Allows the operator to outpulse any number entered at the keyboard to
     get an unsupported test line.

Speed Number
     An abbreviated number assigned to a called number to reduce the number
     of digits that a user must dial. The translated called number can be
     either a division code or a 10-digit DDD number.

SPI port
     Synchronous Peripheral Interface port on AMR microcontroller.

SPL Commands
     Commands which affect node monitor programs by loading both programs
     and data into standby processors in various EMX nodes.

Split Cage
     A redundant configuration of the BSC in which some of the cards in the
     cage are under the control of one SCP while the remainder are under the
     control of another SCP. This allows redundancy to be provided on a BSC
     with only one cage.

Splitter
     Used to take output from one LPA and splits it six different ways for
     each of the six directional sector antennas. Required for omni/sector.

SQL
     Structured Query Language. The standard language for relational
     database management systems as adopted by the American National
     Standards Institute (ANSI X3.135-1989) and the International Standards
     Organization (ISO 9075-1989).

Squelch Circuit
     A radio receiver circuit which disables the audio path when the
     incoming signal is below a predetermined level.

SRAM
     Shared Random Access Memory

SRCHAN
     XC-BTS Subrate Channel.

SRLY
     Site Relay.

SRC
     Square-root Raised Cosine, a type of filtering.

SRVDEN
     Service Denied.

SRX
     Scanning Receiver

SS7
     See Signaling System 7.

SSI
     See Signal Strength Indication.

SSI Bus
     Synchronous Serial Interface bus. Located on the XCDR.

SSP
     Service Switching Point

SSR
     System Status Register

SSN
     Subsystem Number

SSU
     Site Supervisory Unit

SSUL
     Site Supervisory Unit Link

SSW
     Super Synchronization Word.

Subsystem (hardware)
     An independent computer providing a distinct function. Subsystems for
     the MCMC are MC and VRU.

ST
     (1) Start Pulse. (2) Cellular Radio Signaling Tone. (3) Silent
     termination (quiet termination).

S-T-S
     Space-Time-Space switch matrix of the EMX 2500.

STB
     Signaling Terminator Board (located in LPU Bay)

Stable Call
     A call that is in the talking state (2 subscribers connected) and is
     not actively being processed by the system.

Standard Formatted Records
     Fixed-length records output to DAS tape units. Five groups are output:
     ticketing, statistics, time changes, communications, and tape
     management data.

Standby (SBY)
     An indicator about the status of a hardware unit on the EMX that says
     the unit is functioning as a backup; it is ready to be used if needed,
     but is not currently active.

Standby Device
     A device having an associated redundant primary device. In the event of
     failure of the primary device, the standby device is brought into
     service.

Standby-Duplex (SBY-DUP)
     This is an EMX twin processor and control system state in which the
     processor performs none of the normal active processor functions.
     Instead, it monitors the following:

   * Active processor alarms.
   * Execution of sanity checks on the active processor.
   * Receiving and installing of checkpointed data for data base updates.
   * Response of active processor reconfiguration directives.
   * Execution of twin processor Dynamic-Duplex fault detection exercises,
     as directed by the active processor.


Standby-Simplex (SBY-SIMP)
     This is an EMX twin processor and control system state in which the
     processor performs none of the normal active processor functions.
     Instead, it monitors the following:

   * The active processor alarms.
   * Execution of parity checker on the active processor.
   * Response to active processor reconfiguration directives.


Star
     A network configuration defining interconnections between the XC and
     BTS, where a separate 1.544 Mbps HWY individually connects each BTS to
     the CBSC. Only one BTS is affected if the connection fails, but empty
     timeslots increase cost. Contrast to daisy chain and loop
     configurations.

Start Dial
     A type of trunk communication signal generated by the receiving
     station. This signal informs the transmitting station that the receiver
     is ready for data transfer. Also see Delay Dial.

Start Method
     A signaling mechanism used to initiate address signaling on a trunk.

State of an IPR
     An IPR may be in one of three possible states. These are: Enabled,
     Disabled, and Exception. An enabled IPR has not reached its threshold
     value and will be reported if it is logged. An IPR in the exception
     state has reached its threshold value and will not be reported if it is
     logged again during the remainder of the reporting period. All
     exception IPRs are reset to the enabled state at the end of a reporting
     period (30 minutes). A disabled IPR will not be reported if it is
     logged, and will not be reset to the enabled state at the end of the
     reporting period. An IPR is put into the disabled state via the DISABLE
     IPR MMI or a simplex restart.

State Tables
     A two-level table that indicates the most current service condition of
     devices, jobs, nodes, processes, etc. In addition to normal entries, it
     contains classes of entries which are valid in any state (i.e., default
     values). Typical state tables include:

   * Valid process states.
   * Valid input for each state.
   * Next task to be performed.
   * Next state after that task.


State Transitions and Changes
     Any change in the service condition of an active/standby central
     processor unit node, peripheral device, or software process. The EMX
     utilizes a large number of tables to maintain current information on
     the status of all of its component parts.

Static-Duplex
     A temporary EMX twin processor node and control system mode of
     operation in which the EMX processing system is configured for a high
     level of fault tolerance. The primary purpose of this mode of operation
     is for bringing up new generic software load on a live system. In this
     state, the twin processor nodes maintain independent copies of all data
     stored in the memories of the active and standby processors. Not only
     are call processing and data stores not backed up, but customer and
     system data bases are also kept separate on both sides of each
     processing node. Active and standby processors continuously monitor
     each other's performance. The standby processor is capable of assuming
     complete control of the EMX, but will cause a system restart if it does
     take over. In a takeover by the standby processor, customer features,
     in effect, will be preserved.

Station Class Mark (SCM)
     An indication stored in a mobile telephone of its maximum attainable
     power level.

Status Control Manager (SCM)
     Accepts messages from other processors within the switch requesting
     status displays in the form of one or more lights on a hardware panel.
     The SCM maps the status display requests into specific commands to the
     status control interface processor to turn on and/or turn off lights.

Status Control Interface (SCI)
     A slave to the Status Control Manager.

Statistics Messages
     Formatted messages containing call data collected and compiled to
     reflect system usage, subscriber activity, and information for billing
     purposes.

Statistics Records
     Records generated and recorded on magnetic tape including:

   * Tape usage.
   * Radio channel usage.
   * Subscriber usage.
   * System statistics.


STATUS
     See PUT/FORCE/STATUS Commands and PUT/FORCE/STATUS Messages.

Status of Equipped Channels/Devices
     The current service condition of RF channels and all peripherals
     presently installed in a particular EMX system.

Status Information
     In DYNA TAC systems, the following status information is used in this
     section to describe mobile station operation:

   * Servicing-System Status
     Indicates whether a mobile station is tuned to channels associated with
     System A or System B.
   * First Registration ID Status
     Indicates whether a mobile station has received a registration ID
     message since initialization.
   * Local Control Status
     Indicates whether a mobile station must respond to local control
     messages or not.
   * Roam Status
     Indicates whether a mobile station is in its home system or not.
   * Termination Status
     Indicates whether a mobile station must terminate the call when it is
     on a voice channel.


Status Tables
     Data structures used to reflect the changes in service states of
     hardware components, line states, and software processes.

STB
     See Strobe.

STC
     System Timing Controller. Provides the timing functions for the XC
     GPROC.

STE
     See Span Termination Equipment.

STG
     See System Timing Generator.

STRAU
     SC 9600 Transcoder/Rate Adaption Unit. For VSELP encoded speech on the
     64 kbps link, allows changing the number of calls handled on a single
     traffic channel. For full rate, the STRAU occupies two bits in an eight
     bit word.

Strength Threshold
     The power level reading of the mobile when it accessed the signaling
     channel. If the power is too strong, indicating that the mobile was
     very close to the cell, the mobile should not be redirected because the
     cell that it ends up in may order it to tune to a power level that
     would interfere with the calls in the cell in which it is physically at
     that time.

Strobe
     Generally refers to a signal that is used to indicate when information
     on a bus can be considered valid.

SU
     Subunit (also referred to as LU)

Subordinate Acknowledge (SACK)
     The SACK lines are used for two unrelated functions. They are used by
     all the subordinate boards to acknowledge an access, and the lines are
     used by the SMT boards to report timing failures.

Subordinate Control Bus (SCB)
     A generic term for the control paths between the CBI and the
     subordinate matrix boards.

Subordinate Matrix Boards
     A generic name for the various boards in the Switch Matrix Subsystem.
     These boards are subordinate to the SMP boards and include the TSI,
     MUX, SMI, STG, and SMT boards.

Subrate Multiplexing
     A method to switch traffic channels at a rate below
     64 kbps, such as at 32 or 16 kbps, etc.

Subscriber
     End user of telephone services. This term refers only to mobile users
     in an EMX system.

Subscriber Data Base
     Contains all information pertinent to each subscriber associated with
     an EMX system. See Subscriber Files.

Subscriber Files
     Contain all the information pertaining to each subscriber associated
     with a particular EMX system. Specific data items maintained are:

   * Mobile Number
   * Home Service Area
   * Present Location
   * Frequency Band
   * Service Class
   * Service Denial
   * Special Service Feature


Subscriber Information Management (SIM)
     Mode of teleprinter operation that allows the operator to add, delete,
     or change information in the EMX subscriber data base.

Subscriber Number Analysis Process (SNAP)
     The software package that translates all information with the
     subscriber file and number translation tables needed during call
     processing.

Subscriber Option
     A service option purchased by an EMX subscriber (e.g., call
     forwarding).

Subscriber Tables
     Tables containing standard and optional subscriber features and
     numbers, dialing plans, and other data required to complete or deny
     service to or from a mobile unit.

Subscriber Update
     Procedure of a mobile subscriber to dial the proper access codes to
     inform the EMX that he has entered a new service area or to say he is
     returning to his home area. See Automatic Roaming.

Subsystem (hardware)
     An independent computer providing a distinct function. Subsystems for
     the MCMC are MC and VRU.

Supergroup (SGRP or SG)
     1) The collection of 384 ports (24-channel systems) or 480 ports
     (30-channel systems). 2) Collection of the Highway Interfaces (HIs) of
     a GMU, SNU, SNE, SGS or SGE and the remainder of the EMX or RSU switch
     dedicated to these Highway Interfaces.

Supergroup Interface (SGI)
     A Parallel Differential Interface (PDI) card used in the Switch Unit
     (SWU) to communicate with the Group Multiplexer Unit (GMU).

Supergroup Switch (SGS)
     Card cage in an RSU where switch network control, system timing, audio
     port interface, DC and tone trunk signaling control, and all
     interconnect functions are performed. The SGS accommodates one
     supergroup.

Supergroup Switch Extension (SGE)
     Card cage in a RSU that interconnects with the SGS to provide audio
     port interface, DC trunk signaling control, and interconnect functions
     for a second supergroup.

Supergroup Switch Power Supply (SGSP)
     Provides a redundant power source for the supergroup switch cage. That
     cage contains the first supergroup in an RSU or EMX Host using SNC/SWM
     architecture. The cage also contains other hardware necessary for the
     entire one or two-supergroup switch, such as the controlling SNCs and
     both CLK cards. The power supply has its A/B halves "diode ORed"
     together so that loss of one power supply will not cause the SGS to be
     without power.

Supervisory Audio Tone (SAT)
     One of the three tones in the 6 kHz region that are transmitted by a
     land station and transponded by a mobile station in a cellular system.

Supervisory Center
     Part of the O&M Network. Manages the platform of the OMCs.

Supervisory Signaling
     1) That signaling which provides seize, acknowledge, answer and
     clearing information on audio ports by the use of E&M leads, loop
     currents, or SF tones. 2) Line or mobile signals that indicate requests
     to change the service state of a connection (i.e., off-hook, wait,
     on-hook, etc.).

SVC
     (1) Supervisory Controller. (2) Switched Virtual Circuit.

SVR4
     UNIX System V Release 4.

SVCKTS
     IPR log type for service circuit IPRs.

SVM
     See Service Manager.

SW
     (1) Software. (2) Synchronization Word.

Switch
     See EMX Switch.

Switch Control Extension (SCE)
     Extension cage connected to the Switch Control Unit (SCU) node to
     provide expansion slots for peripherals (i.e., Tone Information
     Receiver (TIR), Switch Interface (SWI), etc.).

Switch Control Interface (SCI)
     Processor based card in the Switch Unit (SWU) which controls the
     functions of SWU under the direction of the Switch Control Unit (SCU).
     These functions include: transfer of supervisory signaling, path
     connection, and switch configuration information.

Switch Control Processor (SC)
     One of the coprocessors on SNC cards that provides call processing
     control. The SC reports events and receives instructions via the CP
     processor.

Switch Control Unit (SCU)
     One of the twin processor subsystems (or nodes) within the EMX. The SCU
     controls path connects between all ports and signaling on all ports.
     (See Node.)

Switch Fault Management (SWFM)
     Software to correctly configure the switch for call processing if one
     or more switch devices is determined to be faulty or is taken out of
     service for maintenance. It includes the fault detection software.

Switch Interface (SWI)
     SCU interface card to the SWU for transfer of supervisory signaling,
     path connection, and switch configuration information.

Switch Maintenance Port (SMP)
     An RS-232C port located on the JAM for connecting a local maintenance
     terminal.

Switch Matrix Interface (SMI-1) Card
     Located in the Switch Matrix Subsystem frames, this board contains the
     termination points for the eight, 26-conductor differential ribbon
     cables that provide full-duplex serial 2.048 MHz for the PCM interface
     boards located in the analog/digital frames. These boards also
     terminate the 8-bit parallel 8.192 MHz PCM/DATA bus to the multiplexer
     (MUX) boards. 2) The SMI boards reside in the switch matrix subsystem
     and provide the interface between the switch matrix and the PCMI boards
     in the trunk and service circuit frames.

Switch Matrix Manager (SMM)
     The SMM boards are EMX 2500 compatible microprocessor-based boards
     which constitute the top of the switch matrix control hierarchy. The
     SMM boards are subordinate to the Service Manager.

Switch Matrix Manager Control Bus
     EMX 2500 compatible and provide the control path between the SMM and
     SMP processors.

Switch Matrix Processor (SMP) Board
     Connects appearances on the switch network together and connects
     appearances to the tone bus. These boards are subordinate to the SMM
     and reside in the TSI card cages.

Switch Matrix Tester (SMT-2) Board
     Tests logic and addressing for subordinate control buses; reports
     failures of the selected timing bus; asserts reset signals upon
     detecting a failure via the 20-wide failure indicator (FI) bus;
     interfaces between the main/auxiliary tone buses and the A/B tone buses
     to the switch multiplexer cards; develops test pattern injection for
     the A/B tone buses; provides constant monitoring for the A/B tone
     buses; drives clock select A/B lines, and reports matrix control bus
     contention.

Switch Matrix Subsystem
     The Switch Matrix Subsystem consists of the Switch Matrix Manager
     (SMM), the Switch Matrix Processor (SMP), and the Multiplexer Subsystem
     (all see). Its primary function is the control of the PCM digital
     switch matrix. The specific functions include: Allocate and make a
     one-way or two-way path between two appearances; allocate and make a
     three-way path between two matrix appearances and a third appearance as
     an intermediate connection; drop the intermediate appearance described
     above and make a two-way path between two appearances; break a one-way
     or two-way path, and turn on and off call progress tones and
     announcements to a specified appearance.

Switch Module (SWM)
     Makes path connects (in its Time Slot Interchange[(TSI]), handles PCM
     signaling bits (signal bit processor [SBP]), provides clock control,
     clock distribution and alarm signals for the switch. Internally, the
     SWM supports switching and signal bit processing for one full
     supergroup. The TSI can support two supergroups of PCM; one for its
     local supergroup and one differential PCM highway for the other
     supergroup. There are two SWMs per supergroup; a SWMA and SWMB.

Switch Network Controller (SNC)
     A dual processor card used in an SGS or SNU for control of the network,
     DC and tone trunk signaling, all interconnect functions, and data
     communications with the EMX Host or CPU, NSU, MPP, and SWM.

Switch Network Controller Bus Extender (SBE)
     A card resident in a SGS cage or a SNU cage that provides conversion
     between TTL and differential levels to extend SNC control to SGE cage
     or SNE cage via an SBT.

Switch Network Controller Bus Terminator (SBT)
     A card resident in a SGE cage or a SNE cage that provides conversion
     between differential and TTL levels to terminate SNC control from SGS
     cage or SNU cage via SBE.

Switch Network Extension (SNE)
     Card cage in the EMX 100-PLUS that interconnects with the SNU to
     provide audio port interface, dc trunk signaling control, and
     interconnect functions for a second supergroup.

Switch Network Unit (SNU)
     The unit of the EMX 100-PLUS system that performs all audio port
     interface and interconnect functions in all dc and tone trunk signaling
     functions. This unit is housed in a single card cage.

Switch Unit (SWU)
     Card cage where audio cross-connections are made and where dc
     supervisory signaling information is detected from, and inserted on,
     the TDM Highways.

Switchhook Flash
     See Hookswitch Flash.

Switching Module (SWM)
     A card in the Switch Network Unit (SNU), Supergroup Switch (SGS),
     Switch Network Extension (SNE) or Supergroup Switch Extension (SGE)
     that performs time slot interchange, signal bit encoding and decoding,
     and clock control functions.

SWNO (Switch Number)
     An identification number assigned to a specific cellular telephone
     switching system.

SWS
     Simplex Warmstart.

SX
     Simplex Signaling.

SXCDR Card
     SC 9600 transcoder card. See XCDR.

SYSDB
     System Databases.

SYSGEN
     See Systems Generation Tape.

System Clock
     A 16.384 MHz clock generated on the STG boards and distributed to each
     card cage in the Switch Matrix Subsystem.

System Code
     A digital identification transmitted on a control channel which is used
     to detect capture of a mobile station from another cellular system by a
     land station.

System Frame Sync
     A periodic synchronization pulse of 125 msec which defines the PCM
     frame boundaries and is sourced on the STG boards and distributed to
     each card cage in the Switch Matrix Subsystem.

System Identification (SID)
     A digital identification associated with a cellular mobile service
     area; each equipped area is assigned a unique number.

System Initial Program Load (SIPL)
     An Initial Program Load that loads and restarts only all the processors
     in the switch. Ordinarily this is done only when a switch is started
     for the first time, or when new software release is installed. Also see
     Initial Program Load.

System Number
     Five-digit number identifying the EMX system. This number is used in
     call and statistic records to indicate which EMX system generated the
     record.

System Status Register Processor (SSR)
     The highest level processor in a Maintenance and Status Unit, along
     with a Maintenance Processor. If in-service, the SSR is always the
     active controlling processor.

System Timing Bus
     Distributes the system clock and system frame sync signals to the
     matrix subsystems.

System Timing Generator (STG) Card
     Generates 16.384 MHz clock pulse signals used through the EMX 2500
     system to control circuit timing functions. The boards reside in the
     TSI card cages.

Systems Generation Tape (SYSGEN)
     Defines customer specific system parameters such as cell configuration,
     nature and number of telephone trunks, network plan, etc.

SYSTSTAT
     System verification macro that is executed after completion of an
     application installation, application upgrade or cold loading of the
     platform system. SYSTAT checks the following: Spooler, TMF, TACL
     processes, system processes, disk status, and CPU status.

System Code (SC)
     1) In DYNA TAC systems, a digital identification transmitted on a
     control channel which is used to detect capture of a mobile station
     from another cellular system by a land station. 2) In DYNA TAC systems,
     the stored value of the system code transmitted on a forward control
     channel. See Numeric Information.

System Files
     Contain all information pertaining to hardware components configured in
     a particular EMX system. Tables are used to indicate which components
     are equipped or unequipped.

System Identification (SID)
     A digital identification associated with a cellular mobile service
     area; each equipped area is assigned a unique number.

System Identification; Permanently (SIDp)
     Stored In DYNA TAC systems, the home system identification stored in
     the mobile station's permanent security and identification memory. See
     Numeric Information.

System Identification; Received (SIDr)
     In DYNA TAC systems, the system identification received on a forward
     control channel. See Numeric Information.

System Identification; Semi-Permanently (SIDs-p)
     Stored In DYNA TAC systems, one of a number of system identifications
     stored in mobile station's semi-permanent security and identification
     memory. See Numeric Information.

System Identification; Stored (SIDs)
     In DYNA TAC systems, the stored system identification. See Numeric
     Information.

System and Node Status Reports
     Reports printed at a set teleprinter in response to a status request
     command or as a result of a change in the status of any twin processor
     node.

System Number
     Five-digit number identifying the EMX system. This number is used in
     call and statistic records to indicate which EMX system generated the
     record.

System Recent Change (SYSRC)
     Mode of teleprinter operation that allows the operator to equip or
     unequip EMX components and base site controller hardware.

System Status Register (SSR)
     One of the two microprocessor based boards in the Maintenance and
     Status Unit which controls the interface between the Data Base
     Processor and the alarm and status panels.

System Tape
     (1) Tape unit that contains the backup programs, tables, and recent
     change records. (2) The tape on which user specific programs are stored
     and loaded into the system.

System Timeout Values
     The system recent change commands that use these values give the
     customer the capability of defining how long certain system delays are.
     Only two timeouts may be specified
     termination ring timeout (the time a mobile subscriber's phone will
     ring before the ringing is terminated), and no answer transfer timeout
     (the time the subscriber's phone is rung if no answer transfer is
     active).

Systems Generation Tape (SYSGEN)
     Defines customer specific system parameters such as cell configuration,
     nature and number of telephone trunks, network plan, etc.

SYS
     EMX Control System

SYS A
     "Side A" of EMX Control System

SYS B
     "Side B" of EMX Control System

SYSGEN
     System Generation Tape

SYSRC
     System Recent Change


+---+
| T |
+---+


T1 (T1 Carrier)
     1) The 4-wire digital line carrying the information for a group of PCM
     channels. 2) In the United States, the carrier or medium on which the
     24-channel 1.544 Mbps PCM is routed. (Also called DS1 digital system.)
     See also Span Line.

T1 Span
     The basic 24-channel 1.544 Mbps pulse code modulation system. One T1
     span carries 24 conversations and/or data links.

T1 Tone Detector-1 (T1TD)
     Board Performs digital tone detection of dial tone and a DTMF digit (#)
     for four PCM ports. In the normal configuration, the T1TD monitors
     three data ports (96 channels). The additional capacity is for
     maintenance.

T1TD Board
     See T1 Tone Detector-1 Board.

T43IB
     Type 43 Interconnect Board.

TACL (Tandem Advanced Command Language)
     TACL is a programmable command interpreter that provides the user with
     an interface to the GUARDIAN 90 operating system. It provides standard
     commands and also allows the user to define commands and develop
     routing.

T.A.C.S
     Total Access Communications System

TAD
     Test, Audit and Diagnostics.

TAGS
     Tagged Subscriber.

Talk-Time
     The designation given to the period of time that a cellular
     radiotelephone subscriber is engaged in a record generating (billable)
     conversation.

Tandem Processor
     An intermediate processor between the source and destination processors
     of an EKOS message. A tandem processor receives a message and forwards
     it on to either the destination processor or another tandem processor
     in the chain.

TAPE
     DAS or System Tape Drive

Tape Clock Board (TCB)
     Board that contains the real time clock function and interface to the
     magnetic tape drives. See Dual Port Interface, Magnetic Tape Drive
     Interface and Real Time Clock.

Tape Test
     Two tape tests are provided, a tape functional test and a tape skew
     test. The tape tests are provided in the Admin Processor only.

Tape Unit Designations
     Up to eight tape units are served by two different controllers,
     referred to as A and B by the PROM monitor and boot block programs. The
     system software refers to tape drives by number from 0 to 7 where tape
     drives 0-3 are attached to controller A and 4-7 are attached to
     controller B. Most systems are equipped with two tape drives,
     designated as drives 0 and 4.

Tape Volume
     Physical reel of tape.(Sometimes referred to as Volume)

TAPP Tape Power

TASA
     See Test Access Switch Appearance.

Task
     Smallest unit of EMX code that can be scheduled for execution or queued
     by the EXEC; tasks are the basic building blocks of processes.

Task ID
     A specific number assigned to a group of server classes.

Task Table
     Includes:

   * Locations of task code.
   * Memory available to task extension.
   * Priority class timing information.


TBC
     Token Bus Controller.

TBCD
     Telephone Binary Coded Decimal number. The representation of the
     cardinal numbers 0-9 as binary codes of any length. TBCD converts the
     '0' to an 'A' in hexidecimal.

TBIP
     Test Bus Switch Interconnect Panel.

TBS
     Test Bus Switch.

TC
     (1) Terrestrial Circuit. (2) Toll Connecting Trunks.

TCAP (Transaction Capabilities Application Part)
     The layer of the SS7 protocol that is used to obtain Routing data for
     certain services.

TCB
     Tape Clock Board

TCH
     Traffic Channel.

TCH
     Traffic Channel (Voice and Data).

TCHRF
     1) Traffic Channel (RF). 2) Traffic Channel frequency.

TCOS
     Terminating Class of Service. Also known as Translator Class of
     Service. A TCOS is assigned to each subscriber and to each trunk group.

TCP (Terminal Control Process)
     The process that interprets and executes programs, and controls the
     input/output devices and processes on which the transaction processing
     applications run.

TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
     An internationally used standard that allows addressing and data
     communications between (potentially) non-homogeneous computer systems
     connected via a network.

TDC-1 Board
     See Time-of-Day Clock-1 Board.

TDM
     Time Division Multiplexing

TDM
     Time Division Multiplex. A data communication technique to combine
     several lower-speed channels into one transmission path at a higher
     speed. For example, 24 PCM bit streams can be transmitted over a single
     T1 span line. The information on each lower-speed channel is
     interleaved and assigned a specific time position in the signal stream.
     The signals on the multiplexed high speed channel are separated at the
     receiver to reconstruct the individual low-speed channels.

TDM Bus Time Division Multiplex bus.
     Bi-directional highway bus with eight bit plus parity, carries
     transcoded speech and signaling data between the cards in the
     XC. Operates at 65.536 Mbps. Services 1024 slots operating at
     64 kbps for traffic (voice and data) and control (signaling)
     channels.

TDMA Time Division Multiple Access
     A cellular media access control technique where an MS is granted access
     to the system in a short duration timeslot within the RF carrier. The
     number of active MSs is limited to the number of available timeslots in
     each cell.

TE Termination Equipment
     A cross connection block or other terminating device, for terminating
     and interconnecting cables. Generally used to interconnect between span
     lines coming into a site and equipment at the site.

TECI-1
     See Test Equipment Communication Interface-1 Board.

TEI
     Terminal Endpoint Identifier.

TELCO
     An abbreviation for the landline telephone company.

Teleprinter (TTY)
     Any I/O device capable of generating and accepting character
     communication (i.e., ASCII character set), which is also RS-232C
     compatible. Also called TTY or terminal.

Teleprinter Commands
     The means by which a system operator communicates with the EMX system.
     All commands consist of command name and parameter blocks to indicate
     the function to be performed and the EMX component affected by the
     command. Subparameters within parameter blocks further define the
     activity to be performed. (See your Operator's Manual for complete
     documentation of commands.)

Teleprinter Equipment Table
     Contains identification numbers of all teleprinters or teleprinter-like
     devices (CRTs) that are configured in a particular EMX. Includes:

   * Channel equipped.
   * Dedicated for use by MSU.
   * Indication if channel is a generation time master.
   * Channel is out-of-service.
   * ID number of the backup teleprinter.


Teleprinter Executive (TEX)
     Software package which performs basic syntactical analysis of input and
     output character strings to and from teleprinters.

Teleprinter Mode
     A security feature in the EMX that limits teleprinter/password
     combinations to certain functions. See MASTER, MAINT, RMAINT, SIM,
     SYSRC, and DAS.

Teleprinter Mode Table
     Contains bit maps with all authorized teleprinter operating modes.

TERCKT
     Terrestrial Circuit.

Terminal Handler
     Resident program(s) in the Communication Processor or the SFCC
     Processors which controls the input and output to the Camp terminals.

Terminal Test
     Provided in the Communications Processor. The test performs a reset
     terminal, verifies terminal status, and performs a terminal loopback
     test which includes a read-after-write pattern verification.

Terminate
     To connect a line to equipment, as in a subscriber's radiotelephone.

Terminating Class-of-Service
     A parameter for each subscriber which specifies how long the EMX will
     ring the mobile unit before it routes the call to a tone or recorded
     announcement.

Termination
     The process of getting a MS from the CAC to the TCH for a
     subscriber-terminated call.

Termination Ring Timeout
     A system recent changeable parameter which specifies how long the EMX
     will ring the mobile unit before it routes the call to a tone or
     recorded announcement.

Termination
     Type One of four possible ways a call can be terminated based on
     Outward Route. They are: mobile termination, normal land termination,
     CFC (the call ends with an assigned Call Final Class), or inter-LATA
     (the call is routed to an equal-access long distance carrier).

Test
     A mechanism that verifies the completeness of functionality on a
     specific item and reports the results to the requestor. Test does NOT
     imply an in-service or out-of-service telephony state.

Test Access Switch Appearance (TASA)
     Test port appearance originating on the switch matrix providing testing
     through the switch matrix of all circuits appearing on the system.

Test Alarm Card MMI (TEST ALMCRD MMI)
     Tests for the presence of the specified alarm card and does a read
     after write test to one dedicated test bit (7).

Test Alarm Controller MMI
     Executes a COM-1 loopback test, an individual mux card verification
     test, a walking one test, and a walking zero test on all of the
     controller's cards in order to test for addressing failures on the
     specified alarm controller.

Test Bus Switch (TBS)
     Board Used in the Trunk Maintenance Frame (TMF) of the EMX 2500 to
     perform space division-metallic switching of the 16-line trunk
     maintenance bus. A TBS is is required for every two trunk frames in the
     switching system.

Test Calls
     Several types of test calls are supported by the EMX software. These
     include type 100, 102, 103 and loop around. Refer to the System Recent
     Change (SYSRC) section in the EMX Operator's Manual for a definition of
     these call types.

Test Diagnostics
     Series of diagnostic routines that are available in each processor in
     the EMX 2500 system.

Test Driver
     Provides a series of tests that are available on the EMX 2500 system,
     and provides a message interface for other software subsystems.

Test Equipment Communication Interface-1 (TECI-1)
     Board The interface between a communication processor (controlling
     processor) and an asynchronous serial peripheral device.

Test Line
     See TL102 Test Line, TL1006 Test Line, and TL1009 Test Line.

Test Mobile
     A feature used as a tool for the testing of radio channels in the EMX.
     It is also used to help in diagnosing problems with the channels.

Test Port (TSTP)
     A 4-wire audio port used for testing.

Test Position Data Base
     Specifies the equipped status of the test position, the trunk group
     number for the TASA trunks used by the test position and the DATBs that
     are accessible from the test position.

Test Tone Receiver (TSTR) Card
     A special tone receiver card used to detect the presence of a system
     test tone as well as its level. This card supports a number of
     automated system test features.

Test Trunk Processor (TTP)
     Provides the interface to the transmission test unit in the EMX 2500
     system. Controls the operation of the transmission test unit by sending
     and receiving messages to/from the unit.

Test Trunk Program (TTP)
     Resides in the simplex Trunk Test Processor in the ATTS.

TEW
     Traffic Engineering Workstation.

TEX
     Teleprinter Executive Language

TG
     Tone Generator.

TG-1
     Board See Tone Generator Board. (Also PCM Tone Generator).

TGEN
     Tone Generator

TGI
     Tone Group Interface

TGS
     Tone Group Synchronizer

TGTSTL
     Trunk Group Test Lines.

Third Stage Switch
     Functions to switch each channel to the associated outbound PCM/DATA
     bus to a selected source.

Three-Party Conference (TPC)
     A circuit card optionally mounted in the GMU, SGS, SGE, SNU or SNE used
     to provide interconnection of three subscribers on a conference call.
     Also used during handoffs in order to prevent loss of audio while the
     mobile switches channels.

Threshold Value
     The maximum number of IPR reports that will be recorded in one
     reporting period. A separate threshold value is defined for each IPR.

Ticketing Records
     Include call event data, transfers, handoffs, and subscriber options.
     (See your DAS Programmer's Guide in the Operator's Manual for complete
     listings of record types and formats.)

TICR
     Timer Input Capture Register on AMR microcontroller. Measures fan
     tachometer frequencies.

Time Format
     HH:MM:SS, a time of day format HH:MM, an elapsed time value.

Time Changes
     Manual updates to the Real Time Clock (RTC); formatted messages are
     generated and recorded on tape when the RTC is manually updated.

Time Division Multiplexing (TDM)
     A multiplexing scheme in which the information from a number of
     individual circuits is transmitted over one circuit by allowing
     information from each of the individual circuits to be placed on the
     common circuit at a particular point (time slot) with respect to a
     reference timing signal.

Time-of-Day Clock-1 (TDC-1)
     Board Provides time and date data for administrative and maintenance
     reporting.

Timer Values
     Defines the length of time allowed from the end of a message sent to an
     EMX switch or an IS-41 Converter until a Timeout Message is issued.

Time Slot
     1) A uniquely defined increment of time or clock period in which data
     is transferred. Each time slot is defined by its phase position
     relative to the reference clock (timing) signal. See Time Division
     Multiplexing. 2) In PDC TDMA systems, a short duration of time assigned
     to each user of the RF carrier, used to transmit a voice sample. A full
     rate timeslot occupies 6.67 mS.

Time Slot Interchange (TSI)
     Card in the Switch Unit (SWU) which repositions digital samples from an
     incoming time division multiplexed Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) bus to
     affect an audio cross connection.

Timeslot Interchange (TSI) Board
     Switches pulse code modulation data between trunk frames.

Timeslot Interchange Subsystem
     Refers to the TSI card cage and its resident boards, which include: the
     Switch Matrix Processor (SMP), System Timing Generator (STG), Control
     Bus Interface (CBI), Switch Matrix Tester (SMT), and Timeslot
     Interchange (TSI).

Time Tables
     Includes current state, time data and job memory pointer. Time data
     consists of:

   * Time 00:00:00 through 23:59:59
   * Gregorian date MM/DD/YY
   * Julian date DDD/YY


Timeout
     Indication that an event has not taken place within the expected time
     interval and that some remedial action should be taken.

Timing Advance
     A function of the physical distance between the BTS and MS. The MS
     timing is advanced to maintain coordination with the timeslot as its
     distance from the BTS increases.

Timing Bus Failure (CKF)
     If an active timing bus fails, the CBI transmits an active low signal
     to the SMP. The signal is held active as long as the failure continues.
     Information regarding which subsystem reported the failure is available
     to the SMP in registers on on the CBI. If the failure cannot be
     corrected by switching to alternate facilities, the subsystem reporting
     the failure is masked on the CBI to release the CKF signal so that any
     other possible failure can be reported.

TIR
     Tone Information Receiver

TL
     Test Line.

TL102 Test Line
     A 102-type test line with a 1004 Hz tone at 0 dBm0 for one-way
     transmission measurements.

TL1006 Test Line
     A 100-type test line with a 600 ohm termination.

TL1009 Test Line
     A 100-type test line with a 900 ohm termination.

TLDN (Temporary Local Directory Number)
     A number (alias) used to identify a visiting subscriber for call setup.

TLTM
     EMX Terminating Line Trunk Manager Processor. (See Line Trunk Manager
     and OLTM.)

TMDS
     Tandem Maintenance and Diagnostic System

TMOB
     See Test Mobile.

TMF (Transaction Monitoring Facility)
     a GUARDIAN operating system software utility program that ensures
     database protection and consistency. TMF supports both ENSCRIBE and SQL
     database files.

TMF
     See Trunk Maintenance Frame.

TMM
     See Traffic Metering and Measuring.

TMS
     See Trunk Maintenance Subsystem.

TN
     Trouble Notification.

Token Ring
     A LAN protocol.

Tone Digits
     Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) tones which have been converted into
     digitized format.

Tone Generator (TG-1) Board
     Digitally produces the tones required by the EMX 2500 switch. The TG-1
     board has the ability to add two or more tones with the attenuation of
     each individually programmable. The output consists of a 32-channel
     1.048 Mbps data port which is directly compatible with the MUX Tone
     input port. Provisions are included for an input message port that can
     be internally multiplexed into the tone data stream.

Tone Generator (TGEN)
     A device that generates tones.

Tone Group Interface (TGI)
     The Parallel Differential Interface (PDI) card used in the Group
     Multiplexer Unit (GMU) to interface the Tone Signaling Unit (TSU). See
     Parallel Differential Interface.

Tone Group Synchronizer (TGS)
     The card located in the Tone Signaling Unit (TSU) that serves as the
     interface for the TSU. The TGS collects samples from the tone
     generators in the TSU to be sent to the TGI and also receives samples
     from the TGI to be sent to the receivers in the TSU.

Tone Information Receiver (TIR)
     Depending upon the system, a card in the Switch Control Unit (SCU) or
     Switch Control Unit Extension cage (SCE) that serves as the interface
     to the Tone Signaling Unit (TSU). The TIR receives information from
     TSUs as to what tomes have been detected by which receivers. This
     information is then read by the SCU.

Tone Receiver (TRCV)
     A device that decodes the presence of tones.

Tone Receiver/Generator Assignments
     Instructions that tell the Tone Signaling Unit (TSU) which tone pairs
     should be sent to the Switch Control Unit (SCU).

Tone Receiver Interface Card (TRIC)
     A card in the Network Signaling Unit (NSU) that interfaces the trunk
     signaling tone receivers to the Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) switch bus
     and processes alarm reports.

Tone Receiver-1/Mod 1 (TR-1)
     Board This board accurately detects the PCM equivalent call progress
     tones. It is a special application of the basic tone receiver that is
     used for answer supervision.

Tone Receiver-1 Mod 3 (TR-1)
     Board This board accurately detects the PCM equivalent of MF digit tone
     pairs and reports valid digits to its controlling processor in a form
     the controlling processor can understand.

Tone Signaling Unit (TSU)
     Card cage and its complement of cards which provides for generation and
     detection of system tones in digital form.

Tones
     See Audible Signal.

Topology
     Structure of a network.

Topology List
     A list of neighbor sectors that are possible candidates to receive a
     handover.

Total Access Communications System (T.A.C.S.)
     Motorola mobile/portable radiotelephone system as implemented in Europe
     and compatible systems.

Touch-Code
     A Motorola trademark used to identify Motorola's use of tone-pairs to
     generate DTMF address signals. See Dual Tone Multi-Frequency.

Touch Tone
     An AT&T registered trademark used by the Bell System to describe their
     method of using tone-pairs to generate DTMF address signals. See Dual
     Tone Multi-Frequency.

TP
     Twin Processor

TPC
     Three Party Conference.

TPFM
     Twin Processor Fault Management

TPC 1
     Three-Party Conference. 2. Three-Party Calling.

TPL
     Twin Processor Link

TPWR
     Twin Processor Power

TR-1 Board
     See Tone Receiver-1/Mod 1 Board.

Track
     Consists of the blocks at a specific radius on the recording surface of
     an EMX 2500 system disk.

Tracking
     A measure of how accurately a reconstructed analog waveform compares
     with the original analog signal that was digitally encoded.

Traffic
     The volume of telephone calls that are passed through a telephone
     exchange or other facility during a specified period. See
     Grade-of-Service, Erlang, and CCS.

Traffic Area
     In Nordic systems, a group of base station areas where calls to mobile
     stations are sent out simultaneously.

Traffic Channel (TC)
     In Nordic systems, a radio channel which is used for, or currently in
     use for carrying or originating voice traffic. See Call Channel (CC).

Traffic Circuit
     Carries PCM voice traffic between the MSC and MS.

Traffic Metering and Measuring Subsystem (TMM)
     provides system tools to be used by traffic engineering and switch
     maintenance personnel to determine if the system is engineered and
     operating properly. TMM reports are provided for trunk circuits, trunk
     groups, service circuits, call routing and miscellaneous system data.

Trailer Record
     Record indicating the total number of blocks and records on the tape
     and the time the tape was changed. A trailer at midnight is automatic;
     a trailer at the end of the tape must be generated manually.

Transceiver
     Transmitter plus receiver. When applied to cell site equipment, a
     transceiver converts voice and data signals to or from modulated RF
     signals. For the downlink path, performs TCH or CCH data coding,
     scrambling, encryption, interleaving and building the TDMA slot
     structure. For the uplink path, this process is reversed.

Transceiver (XCVR)
     Card Located in the RF Modem Transceiver Shelf for TDMA systems. XCVR
     cards route TX and RX RF signals. TX signals are received from the GLI
     and sent to the TX Matrix card. Duplex RX signals are received from the
     RX Matrix card, combined, and sent to the GLI. The XCVR controller
     provides link management, call processing functions, and fault
     management for the XCVR card. The FEC block performs channel coding for
     the uplink and downlink paths.

Transceiver Shelf
     Located in the RF Modem for TDMA systems. Houses equipment that
     performs traffic and control channel conversions between CBSC digital
     information and RF signals. Includes RX and TX matrix cards, GLIs, MIO,
     and up to 24 XCVR cards, arranged in two subshelves, A and B.

Transcoder Cabinet (XC)
     The SC 9600 equipment frame housing the subsystem transcoding function,
     traffic channel concentration function, and network interfaces. Part of
     the CBSC. Translates between the PCM 64 Kbps audio of the MSC and VSELP
     digitized audio of the MS. Provides switching connections between the
     MSC and MSs, and assists in handover functions. Performs timeslot
     grooming and configures communication links. Also provides optional
     echo cancellation. Contains up to two XC shelves and various cards
     (AMR, BIB and T43IB).

Transcoder (XCDR)
     Card Performs speech encoding and decoding. Monitors traffic channels
     to minimize audio interruption during handover. Interfaces up to 24 64
     Kbps PCM conversations from the MS. Optionally provides echo
     cancellation.See XCDR.

Transient Call
     A call that is actively being processed by the system; the call is
     either an originating, terminating, hand-off, or a stable call
     undergoing feature-activated state change (e.g., 3-way calling adding
     the third party to the conversation).

Transit Call
     A call made between two EMX systems, usually using a dedicated trunk
     between the two systems.

Transit Trunk
     A dedicated trunk, either one- or two-way, between two EMX systems that
     is used to handle calls and data flow between the two systems.

Transit Trunk Circuit
     A communication path between two switches.

Translated Digits
     Dialed digits which nave been analyzed for cut through codes by
     Subscriber Number Analysis Process (SNAP) which are processed and
     verified as being valid numbers.

Translation
     A conversion of data into another form. Translation usually means digit
     translation. This can be separated into inward and outward
     translations. Inward translations build a directory number from an
     input digit string. Outward translations decide where to route the
     call.

Translation Data
     Information processed by Subscriber Number Analysis Process (SNAP)
     software that provides translated digits, verified feature options,
     cut-through codes, and paging data to other call processing software.

Translation Memory
     External memory that resides on the translator's bus on which the
     subscriber files, routing data base, etc., are stored.

Translation Processor (TRP)
     Consists of dual MP processors and is a slave to the Call Processing
     Manager Extension. The TRP performs data base translations, as
     required.

Translation Processor Manager (TRP-M)
     Same as Translation Processor.

Translations
     Messages generated by Subscriber Number Analysis Process (SNAP)
     software as a result of analyzing dialed digits.

Transmitter Bay
     A bay of the DYNA TAC base station suite which accommodates the
     transmitter equipment for up to 8 voice channels. The transmitter bay
     includes the reference oscillator, distribution amplifier, SAT
     generator, exciter modules, cavity filters, 10-channel junction, and
     harmonic filter.

Transmitter Exciter Module
     Used in the DYNA TAC base station to provide the modulation for the
     voice and signaling channels. The output of the exciter is the actual
     transmitted frequency for the voice or signaling channel.

TRCV
     Tone Receiver

TRIC
     Tone Receiver Interface Card

Treatment
     The action taken by the electronic mobile exchange in the conditioning
     and/or the selection of circuits as a result of analysis of the class
     of service required for a particular subscriber.

TRP
     See Trunk Test Processor/Translation Processor.

TRP-M
     See Translation Processor Manager.

TRP-MEM
     See Translation Memory.

Trunk (TRNK)
     1) A connection between an EMX system and a Central Office or another
     EMX system. Trunks are classified by the direction (in, out, or
     two-way) or by usage (transit). Each trunk is assigned a unique number.
     2) One of a group of interoffice circuits shared by a large class of
     users. An in-trunk terminates at the office to which it is incoming. An
     out-trunk originates at the office from which it is outgoing. A two-way
     trunk is used on a per call basis in either direction. (3) A single
     64-kbps voice or data channel on a given span line between the CBSC and
     MSC.

Trunk Group
     A logical grouping of telephone circuits entering an EMX switch from a
     specific location (e.g., another EMX switch or telephone office). A
     trunk member is a circuit within a trunk group. Each member has the
     same characteristics within a group.

Trunk Group/Member Number
     The logical group of telephone lines entering an EMX from a specific
     location (e.g., another EMX or telephone office). A trunk member is a
     single line within a trunk group. Each member has the same
     characteristics within a group.

Trunk Maintenance Frame (TMF)
     This frame contains the trunk test equipment.

Trunk Maintenance Subsystem (TMS)
     This subsystem controls the trunk test equipment and provides the
     operator interface for manual/automatic modes of operation.

Trunk Manager
     See Line Trunk Manager.

Trunk Signaling
     Interoffice signaling; either dial pulse or MF.

Trunk Test Processor (TRP)
     Monitors the transmission measurement set test data outputs from the
     maintenance test frame and interfaces dedicated and supporting software
     to accomplish automatic trunk testing.

Trunk Test Subsystem
     Provides a detailed procedure to test EMX 2500 trunk circuits for
     conformance to transmission requirements.

TRUNKS
     IPR log type for trunk circuit IPRs.

Truth Table
     A table or chart used to show the relationships between inputs and
     outputs for logic circuits.

TSI
     Time Slot Interchange. The interchange of timeslots within a TDM
     stream. Defines the communication path switch point on the GLI between
     the span line and the XCVR, or between other GLIs or between span
     lines.

TSI Board
     See Time Slot Interchange Board. Also the acronym for Matrix Timeslot
     Interchange.

TSI Card
     Test Subscriber Interface card. Optional, part of RFDS. Interfaces RFDS
     GLI RS485 bus with standard subscriber bus. Communicates command,
     control, alarm and EID information with the GLI.

TSIR
     Redundant Time Slot Interchange

TSCP
     Tandem Service Control Point. A Tandem supplied platform which provides
     many standard subsystems and libraries.

TSCP-2000
     Tandem Service Control Point, 2000 version.

TSPS
     Traffic Service Position System

TSTP
     Test Port

TSTR
     Test Tone Receiver

TSU
     Tone Signaling Unit

TSUP
     Tone Signaling Unit Power

TTD
     Tandem Telecom Division.

TTE
     Trunk Test Equipment. A piece of test gear controlled by the OMCR which
     tests signaling paths between the MSC and CBSC.

TTIP
     Tandem Telecom Installation Process

TTL
     Transistor-Transistor Logic

TTP
     See Test Trunk Processor or Test Trunk Program.

TWC (Three Way Calling)
     A cellular calling feature which allows a subscriber to make three-way
     calls.

Twin Processor (TP)
     The hardware aspects of a node. See Node.

Twin Processor Fault Management (TPFM)
     Controlling software for the EMX twin processor system. It includes
     communications between twin processors, handling of I/O parity errors,
     memory parity errors, write protect alarms, watchdog timer alarms, and
     other faults that occur within the processing system. Also handles
     system configuration and checkpointing (sending non-dynamic data base
     changes; e.g., recent change updates from the active processor to the
     standby processor).

Twin Processor Link (TPL)
     A bi-directional communication path between a pair of processors within
     a node which are provided through the PINL cards.

Two-Wire
     Line A two-conductor metallic circuit used for one-way or two-way
     transmission.

TX
     Transmit or transmitter.

TX Combiner
     Card Located in the PDC of the RF Modem cabinet. Combines sector
     transmit signals from up to four MIO cards and performs 4:1 combining.
     Each of the resulting transmit signals are routed to one LPA.

TX Matrix
     Card Located in the RF Modem Transceiver Shelf for TDMA systems. Under
     control of the XCVR, connects TX signals between the sector LPAs and
     the appropriate XCVRs. Receives diversity TX signals from a XCVR
     subshelf and combines them to form one signal per sector. The output
     signal is routed to the MIO card.

Type I
     The MCMC configuration that prompts the callers for DP or SM and
     supplies voice mail services through a Voice Mail Bank internal to the
     MCMC.

Type II
     The MCMC configuration that prompts the callers for DP or SM and
     supplies access to an external Voice Mail Bank to leave voice mail
     messages.

Type III
     The MCMC configuration that uses an external Voice Mail Bank to accept
     caller's DP, SM, or voice mail, then forwards pages to the MCMC for
     transmission to the appropriate MCMC subscriber.

   * Type 43 DL
   * Interconnect Board Part of the XC. Terminates span line cables for the
     transcoder, interfacing external span lines and the MSIs. Mounted on
     top of the XC cabinet. Provides twelve unbalanced 75-ohm lines coupled
     to the MSI through transformers.



+---+
| U |
+---+


U-Law
     PCM Logarithmic companding algorithm used for speech coding in the
     U.S.A.

UA
     Unnumbered Acknowledge.

UART
     Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter

UBT
     Universal Bus Terminator.

UBT-1
     Board See Universal Bus Terminator Board.

UDC
     Disk/Tape Copy Utility.

UDF
     See Disk File Utility.

UDI
     See Disk Initialization Utility.

UDL
     See Disk Directory List Utility.

UDX
     See Disk Examine Utility.

UI
     User Interface. The textual menu driven interface used in the MC to
     administer and/or access MCMC services.

UID
     User ID.

Unacknowledged Alarm
     Only one alarm per log type and alarm class may be in the ON state at a
     time. An unacknowledged alarm is an alarm which has not yet been
     resolved or acknowledged and which has been followed by another alarm
     which is now ON.

Underlay
     For the Special Product: Overlay/Underlay; indicates the larger (outer)
     cell of an overlay/underlay pair.

Unipolar
     Refers to one polarity. In digital systems, unipolar pulses are
     generated and used within the equipment, but are seldom transmitted
     over cables or other transmission media.

Unit
     A group of functionally related hardware (e.g., a card cage).

Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART)
     A Large Scale Integration (LSI) device which receives and sends a
     serial bit stream and performs serial-to-parallel and
     parallel-to-serial conversion.

Universal Bus Terminator (UBT-1-or BT1)
     Board Satisfies the needs for bus termination and testing, clock and
     frame testing/ arbitration, and support for digital output operations.
     Provides test capability, arbitration, and electrical termination for
     microprocessor control buses.

Universal Tone Generator (UTG)
     A card in the Network Signaling Unit (NSU) that digitally generates
     progress tones, test tones and trunk signaling tones.

Universal Total Access Communications System (U-T.A.C.S.)
     A Total Access Communications System (T.A.C.S.) covering a frequency
     range of 890-905 MHz (Receiving), and 925-950 MHz (Transmitting). Also
     see DYNA TAC and T.A.C.S.

UNIX
     The operating system used in the MM and OMC-R.

UPCH
     User Packet Channel. A common access RF channel providing
     point-to-multipoint bi-directional signaling up- and downlink. Used for
     transfer of user packet data.

Uplink
     The direction from the MS to PSTN (through the BSS, MM, and MSC), taken
     by control and audio/traffic signals in a cellular system.

Upload
     The process of transferring data from a source to a destination.

USC
     User Specified Channel, such as the ACCH, SACCH or FACCH.

U-T.A.C.S
     See Universal Total Access Communications System.

UNREL
     Unreliable

USSI
     Uplink Signal Strength Indicator.

Utilization
     The amount of time a resource is in use over a given time interval.



+---+
| V |
+---+


Vacant Code Group
     An office code which does not exist within a certain area code.

Vacant Mobile ID
     A mobile ID whose position in the block of subscriber information is
     unused.

Valid Foreign File
     In subscriber recent change (SIM), this file contains individual
     mobile-IDs from other mobile telephone systems that are to be given
     some degree of service.

Variable Charge Rate
     A purchasable Special Product which lets the EMX 2500 increment a
     mobile's Charge Meter with a rate that varies depending on a number of
     factors. These factors include dialed digits, type and time of day,
     source group, OCOS, TCOS, and more. Also see Fixed Charge Rate.

VC
     Voice Channel

VCC
     Voice Channel Controller

VCO
     Voltage Controlled Oscillator

VCP
     Voice Channel Processor (part of BSC)

VCXO
     Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator.

VDT
     Volume Data Transfer. An API import/export function used to transfer
     blocks of data from one device to another.

VF
     Voice Frequency.

VGI
     Voice Group Interface (board)

VGU
     Voice Group Unit

Visual Alarm
     The visual alarm panel consists of three lights indicating the three
     alarm classes. The blue light indicates a minor alarm; the yellow light
     indicates a major alarm, and the red light indicates a catastrophic
     alarm. Visual alarms are turned on upon the detection of an alarm and
     turned off when the condition is corrected (provided there are no other
     alarm conditions present). Visual alarm panels may be in the switch
     room or a remote area.

VLD
     Valid

VLR (Visitor Location Register)
     A database of subscriber identification numbers assigned to subscribers
     temporarily registered in a cellular service area outside of their own
     home cellular service area.

VM
     Voice Mail. Voice mail is saved and played from a subscriber's Voice
     Mail Box in the Voice Mail Bank.

VMAC
     Voice Mobile Attenuation Code

VMB
     Voice Mail Bank. An internal VMB is a component of MCMC. The VMB
     manages all voice mail related operations. An external VMB may be
     supplied by another vendor is supported in software release 1.2.0.0 and
     later.

VME
     VERSAbus Module European. A computer backplane definition/physical
     sizing standard developed from Motorola's VERSAbus design in 1981.

VMN
     Voice Mail Notification. The notification from the VMB that a
     subscriber has VM.

VNL
     AT&T Via Net Loss Plan

Vocoder
     Voice encoder/decoder. A device used to compress the
     frequency-bandwidth requirement of voice communications, using a speech
     compression algorithm such as VSELP. The vocoder in the XC performs PCM
     transcoding between PCM and VSELP, while the vocoder in the MS performs
     encoding/decoding between voice and VSELP.

Voice Channel
     In DYNA TAC systems, a channel on which a voice conversation occurs and
     on which brief digital messages may be sent from a land station to a
     mobile station or from a mobile station to a land station.

Voice Channel Controller (VCC)
     In the LD base station, used to control the cell site voice channel
     transceivers and scanning receiver. Can interface with up to 30 RF
     channels, voice and signaling.

Voice Channel Processor (VCP)
     In DYNA TAC systems, the VCP controls up to eight voice channels and
     the mobiles using them. The VCP interfaces to each voice channel
     through an Audio Board (AUD). It sends messages to mobiles under SCP
     control, and decodes and corrects messages from mobiles over the
     appropriate voice channel. The VCP controls voice transmitters and
     voice channel receive antenna selection.

Voice Group
     The designation given to the encoded channels of a PCM span line. The
     number of channels associated with a voice group is usually either 24
     or 30.

Voice Group Interface (VGI-24 or VGI-30)
     Each VGI card interfaces a 24- or 30-channel bank, or PCM span line to
     redundant Group Multiplexer (GMX) card buses at TTL level.

Voice Group Unit (VGU)
     A PCM channel bank. Either 30-channel (CCITT Rec. G.732) or 24-channel
     (CCITT Rec. G.733) units may be used although they may not be
     intermixed on the same EMX; provides D/A and A/D conversion for the
     EMX.

Voice I-F Module
     Used in the DYNA TAC base station to combine the outputs from the two
     strongest sectors (from the matrix module) using maximal-ratio
     combining techniques and detect the desired audio signal.

Voice Mail Box
     A VMB location that saves messages for a particular MCMC subscriber.

Voice Mobile Attenuation Code (VMAC)
     In DYNA TAC systems, indicates the mobile station power level
     associated with the designated voice channel. See Numeric Information.

Voice Operated Gain Adjusting Device (VOGAD)
     In some systems, used in the land-to-mobile path to provide a constant
     volume output for a wide range of voice inputs.

Voice Privacy
     A system in which analog voice signals are scrambled for transmission
     to prevent casual eavesdropping. Mobile units must be equipped with
     Voice Privacy Devices to use this feature. Also see Voice Privacy
     Devices.

Voice Privacy Device (VPD)
     A device attached to a mobile telephone which is used to scramble voice
     transmissions, and unscramble received voice signals.

Voice Privacy Loop
     A connection made at the MTSO to enable land lines to communicate with
     voice privacy mobiles. A voice privacy call is routed through a Voice
     Privacy Trunk, and back to the EMX, before proceeding to the land or
     mobile trunk. Voice signals from the mobile are unscrambled before
     being transmitted to land lines; land voice signals are scrambled
     before being transmitted to mobiles. Not needed for mobile-to-mobile
     voice privacy calls.

Voice Privacy Trunk
     A trunk equipped with a voice privacy scrambler.

Volatile Memory
     A storage element whose contents are destroyed when power is removed.

VOLSER
     The identifier for a tape volume (volume serial number). It can be six
     or fewer characters in length.

Volume
     See Tape Volume.

Volume Serial Number (VOLSER)
     The identifier for a tape volume. It can be a six or less characters in
     length.

VOX
     Voice Operated Transmission

VP
     Vocoder Processor. Located on the XCDR. Encodes and decodes a single
     voice channel.

VPCT
     Common Channel Signaling Voice Path Continuity Test

VPD
     See Voice Privacy Device.

VPR
     Voice Privacy.

VRI
     Voice Response Interface.

VRS
     Voice Retrieval System.

VRU Voice Response Unit
     A component of MCMC which provides voice processing of a caller's
     requests. Voice processing involves playing voice recorded menu options
     to the caller. The caller then selects a menu option by pressing a
     digit on a DTMF capable phone

VSELP
     Vector Sum Excited Linear Predictive speech compression algorithm.

VSWR
     Voltage Standing Wave Ratio. The absolute value of the antenna
     impedance, normalized to that of the RF transmission line (i.e., 50
     ohms).

VVA
     Voltage Variable Attenuator.



+---+
| W |
+---+


Warm Load
     The process involved with loading system software while the EMX
     system is operating.

Watchdog Timer (WDT)
     Refers to a circuit commonly used to monitor the operation of activity
     to insure that the activity is completed within the expected time.

Wait For Overhead Message (WFOM)
     In DYNA TAC systems, identifies whether a mobile station must wait for
     an overhead message train before accessing a system on a reverse
     control channel. See Numeric Information.

WAN
     Wide Area Network.

WDT
     Watch Dog Timer

WFOM
     Wait For Overhead Message. Identifies whether a mobile station must
     wait for an overhead message train before accessing a system on a
     reverse control channel. See Numeric Information.

WiLL Wireless Local Loop

Wink Start
     A type of trunk signaling where the receiver transmits a pulse to the
     transmitter informing the transmitter that the receiver is ready to
     accept incoming data.

Wireline
     (1) The public switched telephone network. (2) A cellular carrier that
     is the same company as the local telephone company.

WiSC
     WiLL System Controller

World Number
     Defined format for any telephone number (e.g., 1-312-555-1212 in the
     North American Dial Plan; see following). Through international
     agreement, the world number is limited to a maximum of 12 digits.

   * 1 Country Code 1 to 3 digits
   * 312 Numbering Plan Area Code 1 to 5 digits
   * 555 Exchange Code 1 to 5 digits
   * 1212 Line Number usually 4 digits


Write
     To introduce data, usually into some form of storage device or medium,
     such as Random Access Memory (RAM) or magnetic tape.

WS
     Work Station.



+---+
| X |
+---+


X
     A decimal digit from 0 to 9.

X.25
     An international signalling standard for connecting cellular
     communications switching systems to a network by means of packet
     switching.

X25AM
     X.25 Access Method

XALM
     External Alarm Input

XC
     See Transcoder Cabinet.

XC PC
     Transcoder Personal Computer.

XC Shelf
     Transcoder shelf. Part of the XC cabinet. Includes most of the XC
     cards: XCDR, MSI, GPROC, KSW, GCLK, CLKX, BTC, LANX, and KSWXs.

XCDR Card See Transcoder Card
     Performs speech encoding and decoding. Monitors traffic channels to
     minimize audio interruption during handover. Interfaces up to 24 64
     Kbps PCM conversations from the MS. Optionally provides echo
     cancellation.

XCLINK FEP
     XC control link.

XCVR
     Card See Transceiver Card.

XLT
     Combined Transponder Test.

X-Sector
     External Sector. A sector managed by an MM outside the OMC-R subsystem.

XSECTOR
     X-Sector.

X-Terminal
     Terminals that provide the graphical user interface and communicate
     with the MMI processor via Ethernet. Connected via LAN to the MMI
     processor for use by an operator.

XTERM
     X-terminal.

XXXX
     Station code (line number). Last 4 of the 10 digits in the North
     American Dialing Plan.



+---+
| Y |
+---+


YP
     Yellow Pages.



+---+
| Z |
+---+


Z8000
     A Zilog 16-bit microprocessor. The microprocessor upon which the EMX
     2500 is based.

Zilog
     Zilog, Inc., Campbell California. Supplier of the Z8000 microcomputers
     and related chips.

Zone Page
     Used in the Special Product: Custom Roaming. A method of paging in
     which pages are issued in all EMXs and paging areas in the subscriber's
     roam package. Also see Directed Page.

ZPROC
     Processor


++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++


Any Questions? Comments? email: [e-mail]



[ END THE CELLULAR GLOSSARY SEKSHUN ONE ]
----------------------------------------------------------------------------



+---------------------------------------------------+

   sekshun two
           news for and about the underground

+---------------------------------------------------+



EPHEDRA MAY GET GANKED FOR GOOD!!
11/07/97

    Ephedra is an herb which is used for dieting and for stimulation.
For years people have used it for many reasons.  Years back, the
chicago scene recognized it for it's stimulating effects almost giving
a "rolling effect".  This was experimented with about two years ago
by people in the pimp crew and it worked slightly.  Taking enough of
this herb will make you feel a little different and it is even known
to help induced lucid dreaming.  This is a completely legal herb sold
in most health food and gnc stores. This herb has also been used in
Herbal Ecstasy, a fake, yet slightly working version of the drug MDMA
used in real Ecstasy.  It may be true that the uprise of "herbal e"
has led to this accusations and warnings issued by the government.
You can still find herbal ecstasy at most raves in chicago, although
it's popularity is dying out due to the high price for the low roll.
MDMA still proves much more sincere to the effects of ecstasy.

    Early this November, the FDA (Food and Drug Administration)
decided to issue warnings against this herb, and as a result many
stores are pulling it off of their shelf.  CNN (Cable News Network)
had a talk show over this to notify the world of these warnings. The
FDA is saying the drug is linked to cardiac (heart) problems and quite
possibly has even lead to some deaths.  Since it is not an illegal
substance in any aspect, it has not been banned; but most likely it
will be.  CNN actually discussed Ephedra Phen-Phen, or something to
the sort of that name, a drug utilizing Ephedra for dietary purposes.
The FDA felt it will severely damage, if not kill, dieters.
Once again, it's a case of whether or not people should listen to the
government trying to tell you what is right or listening to what you
know personally. Hopefully the choice remains with the people.

[ END NEWS SEKSHUN TWO ]
----------------------------------------------------------------------------


╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫
╫                                                                    ╫
╫  the following boards listed hold true to the scene and if you     ╫
╫  are deep into h/p and the likes, i suggest you give them a call.  ╫
╫  some are gone and i haven't kept up with all of them.. most       ╫
╫  should be all good.                                               ╫
╫                                                                    ╫
╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫╫


Apocalypse 2000 - H/P/Punk/Ska/Rave/home of the PIMPS!
[phone] - *NO* ratio. 1 gig online.

hit the Apoc2k home page! http://www.dope.org/fringe/apoc.html

The Centre' - H/P, more than a gig online plus cd's.
luthor - the supapimp sysop
+1-207-INVITE

Poison Pen - H/P, *NO* ratio
[phone]

Moo 'n' Oink - H/P
**(847) toast**

Microcosm - H/P turned art...
[phone]

Underworld 96
**(514) toast**

Aneurysm - H/P - NUP: Discipline
[phone]

Last Territory - H/P
[phone]

Linoleum - H/P
**(704) toast**

Hacker's Haven - H/P
[phone]

Digital Disturbance - H/P
**(516) toast**

Hacker's Hideaway - H/P
[phone]

TOTSE - H/P and crazy other amounts of info
[phone]

The Switchboard - H/P
**(+31) toast**

Arrested Development - H/P
**(+31) toast**




----- If you would like your board listed here and it reflects the h/p
      scene, please email: [e-mail]

----- If you'd like to write for PIMP, you can send any and all worx
      to [e-mail]

      all worx will be looked at and considered.  all credit is always
      going to be given to whomever the giver is, unless you would
      rather not be known.  issue fifteen, toastiez.